CCW R 214W S

PN : 105 - 5359 - 05
MULTIHEAD WEIGHER
CCW-R-2**
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
WARNING
Do not carry out installation, operation, service, or maintenance until thoroughly understanding the contents of this manual. Keep this manual available at all times for installation, operation, service, and maintenance.
Cautionary Items on Software

Thank you for purchasing the product. This product is equipped with a special software program to meet users demands flexibly and promptly. The following contents are to ask the software users for their understandings and the precautions for use. This software is divided into two main branches: (1) Application Program (2) OS (Operation System) Actual operations (such as key input and print) are executed by following the established procedures on the Application Program (1), which is a proprietary program ISHIDA CO., LTD. designed. The OS (2) has a role to perform the basic function (such as data management) when executing the Application Program. The OS, unlike the Application Program, does not have to be exclusive to each product; rather it can be commonly used to different products. For this reason, a commonly used OS is effective, and ISHIDA CO., LTD. use Windows XP Embedded. The following points need to be noted: 1. 2. 3. 4. Do not copy or transfer (use on other devices) Windows XP Embedded. Do not perform reverse engineering, reverse compiling, reverse assembling, or other translations on Windows XP Embedded. Windows XP Embedded is protected by copyright. Users are licensed to use it, which does not mean that the copyright is transferred to users. ISHIDA CO., LTD. are responsible for the all warranties including the warranty of merchantability and the warranty of fitness for special purpose in the use of Windows XP Embedded. Microsoft Corporation is not liable to any responsibility. In case that the above four contents are not understood/accepted or followed, ISHIDA CO., LTD. may have to ask to stop using the product. The actual OS is built in the weigher. Therefore, the above four items are not to be infringed unless the product is disassembled. *Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
IMPORTANT CONSIDERATIONS
WARNING
It is imperative to read and understand the contents of this manual thoroughly when operating the machine or performing any service, maintenance, or inspection procedures. Please be aware of the hazards involved which may not be obvious, and follow the instructions detailed in this manual.
1. It is impossible to enumerate or predict all of the possible dangers of using this equipment and fully list all of them in an instruction manual. When operating the equipment or performing production in any way not specifically described in this manual, please contact the distributor where the equipment was purchased or your Ishida customer service representative before proceeding. Safety countermeasures not specifically described in this manual or indicated on the machine itself should be carefully considered and implemented before performing any operation, service, or maintenance procedures. 2. The copyright for the material in this document is held by Ishida Co., Ltd., and all information contained herein is protected by the Copyright Law. Any disclosure to third parties or unauthorized copying of the information contained herein is not permitted without prior written approval from Ishida Co., Ltd. 3. Although this manual has been carefully edited, if there are any mistakes, or if you have any questions, please contact your local Ishida Service representative or its local distributor/ representative. The model number and machine number are printed on the equipment plate attached to the equipment. 4. The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice.
Equipment Plate
(1)
(2)
WARRANTY CONDITIONS
WARRANTY CONDITIONS
1. Ishida Co., Ltd. only assumes responsibility for repairing or replacing components which are deemed to be defective due to improper design or manufacturing. The measures to be taken for defects whose origin is unclear shall be decided by mutual consultation between both parties. 2. Ishida assumes no responsibility for loss, injury or damage which are the result of unauthorized or unforeseen operational procedures. 3. The warranty period is stated in the Certificate.
(3)
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
MANUAL OBJECTIVES AND STRUCTURE
1. Purpose of this manual

This manual is designed to provide users with information about the operation, service, maintenance, and installation on the Ishida multihead weigher. 2. How to read this manual and how this manual is organized The early chapters of this manual contain basic information on safety consideration, structure, or the operation of this equipment. The latter chapters contain more specialized information on detailed descriptions of the weigher functions (including data setting), maintenance, or troubleshooting. In order to acquire information which is necessary for your service, personnel involved in daily production should read the early chapters, personnel involved in management and maintenance of the weigher should read all chapters thoroughly. The structure of this manual, the contents of each chapter, and the intended readers are described in the table below. All personnel involved in operations with the equipment should select the required information to make effective use of this manual.
Note
The definition for each intended reader described in the table below is as follows: Operator: Personnel who perform basic operations during daily production with the production line (i.e. Operator Level). Do not perform any work described in this manual if it is targeted to any personnel other than Operator. Personnel who set weighing parameters or tune the equipment (i.e. Site Engineer Level). Do not perform any work described in this manual if it is targeted to Maintenance personnel.
System manager:
Maintenance personnel: Personnel who have specialized knowledge about the equipment and perform maintenance or inspection of the equipment (i.e. Installation Engineer Level). Do not perform any work described in this manual if it is targeted to Service personnel. Ishida Service representative: Personnel who perform tuning when installing the equipment. There is no limitation in performing works described in this manual unless specially.
(4)
Chapter
1 Safety
Contents
Locations of the warning labels Precautions to be observed Types and definitions of the warning indications Intended use, features, and specifications of the equipment Special terminology used in this manual Main components and operation outline of the equipment
Intention
To maintain the security of personnel and familiarize with hazardous areas of the equipment.
Intended reader
Owner of the equipment All personnel involved in operations with the equipment
2 Introduction
To understand the basic All personnel involved in configuration, operation outline, operations with the intended use, and scope and limit of equipment applications of the equipment
3 Remote control unit Meanings of the indications displayed on the operation panel of the remote control unit Description of the common operations of the remote control unit 4 Production Outline of production sequence and pre-production procedure Adjustment procedures required during production Menus for setting parameters for different products Functions of each menu Advanced operations
To understand and master the basic and common operation procedures of the remote control unit
All personnel involved in operations with the equipment
To understand and master the basic Operators production procedure sequence and System managers the adjustment procedures required during production To understand and master the procedures for setting parameters for weighing a new product System managers
5 New products
6 Functions of the operation panel 7 Useful functions
To understand the functions of and Operators operating procedures for each menu System managers To understand and master advanced Operators operations System managers To understand and master the optional functions To understand and master the mounting, removing, and cleaning procedures of each component in order to prevent foreign matters from getting in and to keep the equipment in hygienic condition To understand and master the maintenance and inspection procedures for each component in order to keep the equipment in optimum condition and prevent production loss To understand and master the actions for errors which occur during production in order to enhance efficiency System managers Operators Maintenance personnel
8 Optional functions Piece weighing Parent and child weighing 9 Cleanup procedures Cleanup procedures and period
10 Periodic maintenance
Daily and periodic inspection Adjustment of the components
Operators Maintenance personnel
11 Troubleshooting
Error messages and corrective actions Errors, causes, and actions Installation conditions, lifting for shipping, and installation procedures
System managers Maintenance personnel
12 Installation
To understand and master proper Maintenance personnel installation locations and Ishida Service environments, safety transportation representatives and shifting of the equipment, and secure installation
13 Appendix
Board location in the electric unit To provide information on servicing Maintenance personnel Overall wiring diagram and block of the weigher and replacement of Ishida Service components. diagram representatives Index To search necessary information with a keyword in this manual. All personnel involved in operations with the equipment
End of the manual
(5)
3. Illustrations and notations used in this manual
Illustrations of the equipment

The illustrations used to describe the operation procedures are drawn in the most general shapes. The actual equipment may differ slightly from the illustrations.
Descriptions for key operations

Most operations of the equipment are performed by pressing the virtual keys displayed on the operation panel of the remote control unit. In this manual, the operation by pressing these keys are described as follows: EX. Press the [XXX] key.
Notations used in this manual

The following notations are used in this manual in order to make understanding of information easier.
Indication
DANGER
Explanation If this hazard is not avoided, death or serious injury will probably result. This indicates a clear and immediate danger, and extreme caution must be exercised to prevent a mishap. If this hazard is not avoided, there is a possibility of death of injury resulting. If this hazard is not avoided, there is a possibility that light or moderate injury may result. It may also indicate that a possibility of damage to equipment exists. Used to emphasize or clarify an important point in the manual. Gives information which helps understanding. Indicates what you must not perform. Indicates what you must perform. Indicates pages for reference.
WARNING
CAUTION
Note
TIP
(6)
CCW-R-2** INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Table of Contents
GENERAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

1 SAFETY
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Warning Indications -Types and Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 General Precautions to be Observed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 Special Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Warning Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.5.1 1.5.2 Warning Label Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Warning Label Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.6
Drive Power Shutdown and Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
2 INTRODUCTION
2.1 2.2 2.3 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Intended Use of the Weigher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3 Standard Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Outline Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Installation Location and Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.4 2.5 2.6
Terminology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Main Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Operation Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
3 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT

3.1 3.2 3.3 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Components and Functions of the Remote Control Unit (RCU). . . . . . . 3-2 Operation Panel and Data Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.3.1 Operation Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.2 Data Entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.2.1 Entering Numeric Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.2.2 Entering English Alphabet Data, Numeral Data, and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.3 Correction after Data Entry and Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 3-6 3-6 3-8 3-9
4 PRODUCTION
4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Emergency Stop and Restart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Outline of Production Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Production Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4.4.1 4.4.2 4.4.3 4.4.4 4.4.5 4.4.6 4.4.7 4.4.8 4.4.9 4.4.10 Pre-Startup Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Weigher Power On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Control Unit Power ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Startup Assistant Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 Select Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 Zero Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 Starting Production . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 Stopping Production . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 Draining the Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 Weigher Power Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
4.5
Displays during Production . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

4.5.1 Combination Weight Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 4.5.1.1 Display selection Menu on the Production menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
4.6
Production Pause and Restart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

4.6.1 4.6.2 Production Pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22 Production Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22 Every output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23 Current Total Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
4.7
Production Status Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23

4.7.1 4.7.2
4.8
Printer Paper Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
5 NEW PRODUCTS
5.1 5.2 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 Presetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.2.1 Setting Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.2 Registration Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.3 Preset Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.3.1 Product Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.3.2 Setting the Machine performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.3.3 Setting the Weight Value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 5-4 5-5 5-5 5-8 5-9
5.3
Preset data Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
6 FUNCTION OF THE OPERATION PANEL

6.1 6.2 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Operation Keys and Operation Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.3
Upper Setting Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

6.3.1 Message Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 6.3.2 Start-up Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12 6.3.3 Selecting a Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 6.3.4 Selecting an Operation Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14 6.3.4.1 Switching to the Operator Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 6.3.4.2 Switching to the Site Engineer Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 6.3.4.3 Switching to the Installation Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16 6.3.5 Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18 6.3.5.1 Screen Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19 6.3.5.2 Password Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20 6.3.5.3 Destination ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21 6.3.6 Setting the Date & Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24 6.3.7 Help function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
6.4 6.5 6.6
Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27 Zero Adjustment Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29 Production Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
6.6.1 Combination Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6.1.1 Display Selection Menu on Production Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6.2 Feeder Adjust Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6.3 Timing Adjut Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6.4 Total Data Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6.5 Weight Display Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32 6-33 6-34 6-34 6-35 6-36
6.7 6.8
Drain Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37 Full Open Lock Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39

6.8.1 6.8.2 Full Open Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40 Feeder Adjust Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41 Photo Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42 List Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43 6-45 6-45 6-48 6-49 6-51 6-52 6-54 6-55 6-55 6-56 6-56 6-57 6-58
6.9
Select Preset Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42

6.9.1 6.9.2
6.10 Preset Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44

6.10.1 Product Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10.1.1Product Tab Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10.1.2Machine Tab Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10.1.3Item Tab Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10.1.4Others Tab Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10.2 Feeder Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10.3 Timing Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10.4 Weight Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10.4.1Target Weight Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10.4.2Upper Weight Limit Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10.4.3Lower Weight Limit Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10.5 Changing the Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10.6 Output the Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.11 Total Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60

6.11.1 Current Total Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61
6.11.2 6.11.3 6.11.4 6.11.5 6.11.6
X-bar Chart Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transitional Data of Weigher Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Participation Data per Head Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Total Setting Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation Log Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-66 6-67 6-68 6-69 6-70
6.12 Feeder Adjustment Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-71

6.12.1 Feeder Adjustment Menu Display Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-74 6.12.2 Auto Adjustment Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-76 6.12.3 Auto Adjustment range Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-81
6.13 Timing Adjustment Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-83 6.14 Machine Set Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-85
6.14.1 Manual Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-86 6.14.1.1 Weigh Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-86 6.14.1.2Combination Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-89 6.14.1.3Vibration Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-90 6.14.2 Self-diagnosis Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-91 6.14.2.1Device Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-91 6.14.2.2Input / Output junction signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-92 6.14.2.3Network Analyze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93 6.14.2.4Program number display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-95 6.14.2.5Test Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-96 6.14.3 Layout Setting / Data Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-99 6.14.3.1Layout Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-99 6.14.3.2Preset Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-100 6.14.3.2.1Preset Manager and Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-100 6.14.3.2.2Coping all presets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-102 6.14.3.2.3Selection and Initialization of Preset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-104 6.14.3.2.4Initialization of all presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-105 6.14.3.3Machine Set edition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-107 6.14.3.3.1Selection and copy of the Machine Set items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-108 6.14.3.3.2Coping all Machine Set items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-109 6.14.3.3.3Selection and initialization of the Machine Set item . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-111 6.14.3.3.4Initialization of all Machine Set items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-112 6.14.4 Parameters Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-114 6.14.4.1Weight details setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-114 6.14.4.2Combination details setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-116 6.14.4.3Section division setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-118 6.14.5 Weigher setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-119 6.14.5.1Participating Machine Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-119 6.14.5.2AFD Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-120 6.14.6 Peripheral devise setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-121 6.14.6.1Packer interlock specification setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-121 6.14.6.1.1Packer Interlock Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-122 6.14.6.1.2Ring Shutter Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-123 6.14.6.1.3Reject Timing Hopper Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-125 6.14.6.1.4Timing Hopper Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-125 6.14.6.2Feeder Details Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-126
7 USEFUL FUNCTIONS
7.1 7.2 7.3 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 New product registration quoting registered product data . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.2.1 7.3.1 7.3.2 Copy and edition of registered product data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Using Feeder Adjustment Function on the DRAIN Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Using the Full Open Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Changing the Production Method Quickly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
8 OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS
8.1 8.2 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Parent and Child Weighing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8.2.1 Types of Parent and Child Weighing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2.1.1 Parent and Child Mix Weighing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2.1.2 Bonus Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2.2 Setting Items Related to Parent and Child Weighing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2.3 Procedures to Set Parent and Child Weighing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2.4 PRODUCTION Menu during Parent and Child Weighing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 8-2 8-2 8-4 8-7 8-9 8-10 8-12 8-14 8-15 8-17
8.3
Count Priority Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

8.3.1 8.3.2 8.3.3 8.3.4 8.3.5 Setting Items Related to Count Priority Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Piece Weight Revision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedures to Set Count Priority Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitoring Menus Displayed during Count Priority Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . Count setting output during driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9 CLEANUP PROCEDURES
9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 Before Washing and Sterilizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Methods of Washing and Sterilizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Washing and Sterilizing Procedures for Each Unit and Component . . . 9-8
9.4.1 Removable unit cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 9.4.1.1 Inlet Chute. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 9.4.1.2 Dispersion Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 9.4.1.3 Radial Trough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10 9.4.1.4 Pool and Weigh Hoppers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11 9.4.1.5 Collection Chutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12 9.4.1.6 Discharge Chutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13 9.4.1.7 Timing Hopper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14 9.4.2 Cleaning Unremovable Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15 9.4.2.1 Main Unit, Dispersion Unit, and Drive Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16 9.4.2.2 Remote Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
10 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
10.1 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 10.2 Daily Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
10.2.1 Pre-Startup Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
10.3 Periodic Inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

10.3.1 10.3.2 10.3.3 10.3.4 10.3.5 10.3.6 10.3.7 10.3.8 10.3.9 Span Check (Monthly) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Span Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 Open/Close Operation Check for the Hopper Gate (Monthly) . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 Check for the Hopper Open/Close Roller (Monthly) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10 Amplitude Check for the Radial Feeder (Monthly) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10 Crack Check (Annually) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11 Check for the Rubber Cover (Annually) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12 Replacement of Memory backup battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 Fuse replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
11 TROUBLESHOOTING
11.1 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 11.2 Error Display Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
11.2.1 11.2.2 11.2.3 11.2.4 11.2.5 11.2.6 11.2.7 11.2.8 11.2.9 Pattern 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5 Pattern 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9 Pattern 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11 Pattern 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13 Pattern 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14 Pattern 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14 Pattern 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15 Pattern 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15 Error Clear and Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
11.3 Weigher Malfunction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17 11.4 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-20 11.5 Handling Drive unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-24
12 INSTALLATION
12.1 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 12.2 Installation Location and Environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 12.3 Shipment and Lifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
12.3.1 12.3.2 12.3.3 12.3.4 Shipment Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lifting Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Weight, Center of Gravity, and Dimensions of the Weigher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lifting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3 12-4 12-5 12-6
12.4 Installation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7

12.4.1 Unpacking the Weigher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8 12.4.2 Checking the Weigher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
12.4.3 Carrying In and Installing the Weigher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8 12.4.4 Connecting the Power Cable and the Remote Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8 12.4.5 Mounting the Timing Hopper Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11 12.4.6 Connecting the TH Signal Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11 12.4.7 Installation of the Timing hopper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12 12.4.8 Mounting the Discharge Chute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12 12.4.9 Mounting the Collection Chute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12 12.4.10 Mounting the Radial Trough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13 12.4.11 Mounting the Dispersion Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13 12.4.12 Mounting the Weigh Hopper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13 12.4.13 Mounting the Pool Hopper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14 12.4.14 Connecting with the Interlocked Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
12.5 Post-Installation Check and Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17

12.5.1 12.5.2 12.5.3 12.5.4 12.5.5 12.5.6 Checking Condition of Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Turning the Power On. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Access Level Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zero Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Span Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17 12-18 12-19 12-21 12-23 12-25
13 APPENDIX
13.1 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 13.2 Electrical Unit Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2 13.3 Overall Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3 13.4 Remote Control BOX unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
13.4.1 RCU Board (P-970*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 13.4.2 PRN Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 13.4.3 TP-I/F Board (P-5573*). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
13.5 Main Electrical Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8

13.5.1 13.5.2 13.5.3 13.5.4 HUB Board (P-5535*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9 MPS Board (P-5436*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9 FDRV Board (P-5578*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10 FDC Board (P-5532*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
13.6 Base Unit Feeder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

13.6.1 Preamp Board (P-5435*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
13.7 AFV Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

13.7.1 AFV Preamp Board (P-5488*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
13.8 Relay Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

13.8.1 EXC Board (P-5426*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14 13.8.2 Relay Board (P-5506*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
13.9 PS-0 Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16 13.10 PS-2 Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17 13.11 Weight/Drive Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
13.11.1 DUC Board (P-5428*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18 13.11.2 DDU Board (P-5439*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
13.12 CAL UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19

13.12.1 ADC BOARD (P-5576*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20 13.12.2 WCU BOARD (P-5561*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21 13.12.3 DMU board (P-5562 *) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22
13.13 PS FEEDER UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-24

13.13.1 FPS BOARD (P-5580 *) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-24
13.14 Circuit Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-25

13.14.1 [TOTAL DIAGRAM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-25 13.14.2 BLOCK DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-25
1 SAFETY
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Warning Indications -Types and Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 General Precautions to be Observed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 Special Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Warning Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Warning Label Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Warning Label Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.5.1 1.5.2
1.6
Drive Power Shutdown and Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
<MEMO>
1 SAFETY
1
1.1
SAFETY
Summary
The information in this chapter is designed to instruct persons who own, install, operate, service or inspect this equipment on warning indications, precautions which must be observed, and warning labels attached to the machine.
WARNING
Before attempting to perform any operation, maintenance or inspection of this equipment, it is imperative to read and understand the instructions in this manual and to carefully observe all safety precautions and warnings contained herein. If there are any unclear points or questions concerning the information contained in this manual, please consult the distributor where the equipment was purchased or your Ishida customer service representative before proceeding.
<Contents>
Locations of the warning labels Precautions to be observed Types and definitions of the warning indications
<Intention>
To maintain the security of personnel and familiarize with hazardous areas of the equipment
<Intended reader>
Owner of the equipment All personnel involved in operations with the equipment
1-1
1 SAFETY
1.2
Warning Indications -Types and Definitions
The warning indications contained in this manual, as well as the indications on the labels attached to the machine, are ranked into three categories according to the level of hazard involved. Sufficiently understand the meaning of the following warning indications and follow the instructions in this manual. Table 1-1 Warning Indications
INDICATION
DANGER
EXPLANATION
If this hazard is not avoided, death or serious injury will probably result. This indicates a clear and immediate danger, and extreme caution must be exercised to prevent a mishap. If this hazard is not avoided, there is a possibility of death or injury resulting.
WARNING
CAUTION
If this hazard is not avoided, there is a possibility that light or moderate injury may result. It may also indicate that a possibility of damage to equipment exists.
1-2
1 SAFETY
1.3
General Precautions to be Observed
This section describes the general safety precautions which must be observed when handling the equipment.
DANGER
When opening the main body cover to perform work, do not touch the electrical components. There is a danger of electrical shock. All electrical work for the installation site must be performed by licensed electrical contractors. All maintenance and inspection work involving electrical components must be performed by qualified maintenance personnel. Electrical shock or equipment malfunction may result if unqualified personnel are permitted to perform maintenance or inspection of electrical components.
WARNING
Never touch any electrical switches or buttons with wet or damp hands. Electrical shock may occur when the equipment is not properly grounded or when there is electrical leakage. Do not operate the equipment with the cover of each part removed. Before starting operation of the equipment, make sure that all covers are securely shut and fastened. Do not touch any moving parts during operation. Failure to observe this warning may cause personal injury. Personnel with long hair using this equipment should tie up their hair securely and all personnel must wear a cap or hat as well as clothes and shoes suitable for the production environment. Unbound long hair or inappropriate clothing may become caught in moving parts, and injuries may result. Before performing any maintenance or inspection work on the equipment, especially work which is not specifically indicated in this manual, shut off and lock the main power switch. The person performing the maintenance should keep the key in his possession while performing the work. Injury or electrical shock may result if the equipment is turned on by other person while maintenance, etc. work is being performed. Turn off the main power switch then wait at least 3 minutes before performing any maintenance or inspection work on the equipment. Residual charge may remain in the machine even after the power has been turned off. Also, turn off the power of any upstream/downstream units which are connected or adjacent to the equipment, otherwise there is a danger of electrical shock.
1-3
1 SAFETY
If maintenance or inspection work is to be performed with the main power switch ON, clearly indicate this situation by posting a sign in the work area. This is to prevent other personnel from accidentally starting up the equipment.
CAUTION
Do not press the operation panel of the remote control unit using a ball-point pen or other pointed object. Using a pointed object can damage the operation panel. Use finger to press the operation panel of the remote control unit. When performing maintenance and inspection work on the upper part of the equipment, use a sturdy ladder or foothold to avoid a hazardous fall. When starting production, make sure that there is no object such as a tool on the machine. If objects fall into moving parts, damage to the equipment may result.
1-4
1 SAFETY
1.4
Special Safety Precautions
This section describes special safety precautions for this equipment which, in addition to the previously mentioned precautions, should be carefully observed.
WARNING
Before cleaning the equipment, shut off and lock the main power switch. The person performing the cleaning should keep the key in his/her possession while cleaning. Electrical shock or injury may result if the equipment is turned on by other person.
CAUTION
Do not use the same power supply for devices which may emit noise. Doing so may result in malfunction or damage. Do not apply insecticide or other foreign substances inside the main body, terminal boxes, motor boxes or other enclosed equipment compartments. Doing so may cause machine malfunction or damage. Do not apply excessive load to the weigh hoppers. Doing so may damage the weigh mechanism. Do not install wiring which permits load-related power fluctuations of more than 10%. Overload may result in malfunction or damage. Weighing fresh meat or cut vegetables with this equipment under improper conditions may result in hygienic hazards. Perform cleaning under the proper procedures according to product conditions and weighing methods. Read through and understand Chapter 9 before performing cleaning.
1-5
1 SAFETY
1.5
Warning Labels
Warning labels which indicate points requiring particular caution are attached to the equipment at certain locations. Please take sufficient time to familiarize yourself thoroughly with the meanings and positions of these labels.
1.5.1
Warning Label Handling
First verify that all the warning labels are clearly legible. If the label text or graphic is difficult to read, clean or replace the label. Clean labels with a cloth, water, and neutral detergent. Do not use organic solvents or gasoline. Labels must be replaced if they are damaged, peeled, or illegible. Consult the distributor where the equipment was purchased or your Ishida customer service representative specifying the model number and machine number.
1.5.2
Warning Label Location
The diagram below shows the location of warning labels. (See Fig. 1-1 .)
Fig. 1-1 Warning Label Location
Table 1-2 Warning Label Location

No.
1 2
Location
Attached to the rear of the equipment Attached to the side of the equipment
Type of hazard
Electrical shock Electrical shock
1-6
1 SAFETY
1.6
Drive Power Shutdown and Indication

WARNING
Before performing maintenance or inspection, electrical power should be shutdown to ensure the safety of personnel.
To prevent other personnel from starting operation while this work is being performed, the followings should be recommended. The main power switch should be shut off and locked. A tag clearly indicating that maintenance work is in progress should be prepared and posted on the power shutdown device. Lock the main power switch and attach the accident prevention tag as shown below.
NOTE The lock and tag should be prepared by the user.
Accident Prevention Tag (Example)

FRONT BACK
DO NOT OPERATE
Signed by: Date:
DO NOT REMOVE THIS TAG!
SEE OTHER SIDE
Fig. 1-2 Main Power Switch
Table 1-3 Main Power Switch

No.
1 2 3 Main power switch Lock Accident prevention tag
Name
1-7
1 SAFETY
1-8
2 INTRODUCTION
2.1 2.2 2.3 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Intended Use of the Weigher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Standard Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Outline Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Installation Location and Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3
2.4 2.5 2.6
Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Main Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Operation Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
<MEMO>
2 INTRODUCTION
2
2.1
INTRODUCTION
Summary
This chapter describes the special terminology used in this manual, conditions of the heads, main components, and operation outline. This manual assumes that the weigher is installed with the software of the following program No.: RCU-MAIN : PROGRAM No. R6129
<Contents >
Intended use, features, and specifications of the weigher Special terminology used in this manual Main components and operation outline of the weigher
<Intention>
To understand the basic configuration, operation outline, intended use, and scope and limit of applications of the weigher
<Intended reader>
All personnel involved in operations with the weigher
2-1
2 INTRODUCTION
2.2
Intended Use of the Weigher
This weigher is used to weigh the products to the set value by the computer that controls combination calculation. This weigher is used to weigh a wide range of products such as snack foods, candies, or machine parts. *1 *1 The weighed material should be limited to those permitted by Ishida Co., Ltd. for the design of the weigher.
2-2
2 INTRODUCTION
2.3
Specification
In this section, the specifications of the weigher are described. Please read and understand this section thoroughly to use the weigher properly.
2.3.1
Standard Specification
Please verify the specifications for your weigher with the separately submitted specifications. Also, the standard specifications of this weigher can be verified with the product catalogues.
2.3.2
Outline Dimension
Please verify the outline dimension for your weigher with the separately submitted drawing. Designs and dimensions may be changed without prior notice.
2.3.3
Installation Location and Environment
The weigher should be operated under the following environments for using its function effectively and maintaining its precision as well as for performing the weighing operation safely. Indoors Ambient temperature range: 0 to 40 C Ambient humidity range: 35 to 85% (No condensation) Installed on a hard horizontal surface with minimum vibration Sufficient area around the weigher to perform maintenance No electrical interference from such devices as a wireless transmitter
2-3
2 INTRODUCTION
2.4
Terminology
Table 2-1 Terminology
Term Definition
The food, etc., material which is being weighed The upstream unit which feeds product to the weigher The downstream unit which packages product The address of the separated head when selecting the participating machines After zero adjustment is executed, a standard "span" weight is memorized as a reference weight. Weighing is not performed while all product is discharged from the weigher. Appellation for the radial troughs, pool hoppers, weigh hoppers, and weigh/drive unit Discharge request signal output from the packer to the weigher Product weight exceeds the upper limit. Product weight is below the lower limit. Product weight is within the permissible range. Signal output from the weigher to an external unit to indicate that the product has been discharged. The state that the product exceeding the (set value + upper limit) weigh is supplied to the weigh hopper, or the weigh in the weigh hopper exceeds the head weigh The time interval between successive discharges when product is discharged in separate sets to prevent product jam at the packer Interlock mode in which the weigher discharge is initiated by one-shot signal from the packer Interlock mode in which the weigher discharge is initiated by continuous signals from the packer Interlock mode in which the weigher and the packer exchange confirmation signals before discharge Interlock mode in which self-run calculation discharge is performed after a signal is received from the packer. The discharge completion signal is then sent to the packer. Abbreviation for "Anti Floor Vibration mechanism." In an environment with floor vibration, the AFV cell detects vibration and offsets its influence on output of the load cell. The maximum weight to be weighed During production, the weigh hoppers which are not used frequently for combination calculation are selected and adjusted automatically so that the weight reads zero. Data related to weighing is set in advance. Several weigh hoppers are selected so that their total weight is the closest to the target weight and discharge products from the selected hoppers. Overloaded state of the weigh sensor due to an external factor
Some of the special terms used in this manual are explained below.
Product Infeeder Packer Section Span Drain Head Interlock signal (IS) Overweight Underweight Proper weight Discharge completion signal (DS) Overscale Stagger delay (STAGGER) Slave Master Stroke-on-demand Bag-on-demand AFV
Range Auto zero adjustment Presetting Combination calculation Full-scale
2-4
2 INTRODUCTION
Table 2-1 Terminology (Continued)

Term
Multi dump
Definition
In the case that the target weight exceeds the range, or the products overflow from the weigh hoppers to attain the target weight in one weighing, the target weight is attained by multiple weighing.
2-5
2 INTRODUCTION
2.5
Main Components
1 2 3 4 5 6
This section describes the main components and the functions.
7 8
13
15
9 14
10
11
12
Fig. 2-1 External View
Table 2-2 Unit Descriptions

No.
1
Name
Inlet chute (Optional) Dispersion table Dispersion feeder (DF)
Functional description
Product inlet The funnel-shaped inlet chute guides product fed from the infeed equipment onto the center of the dispersion table. The dispersion table receives the vibration from the dispersion feeder and conveys product from the inlet chute to the radial troughs. A circular disk which vibrates to convey product onto the radial feeders. Product flow amount is controlled by means of the weigh sensor which measures the amount of product on the dispersion table. The radial troughs receive vibration from the radial feeders and convey product to the pool hoppers. The radial feeder vibrates to move product across the radial troughs. Each pool hopper receives product fed from the radial troughs above it and holds it temporarily in synchronization with product weighing. The pool hoppers open or close according to the weighing operation to feed product into the weigh hoppers. The weigh hoppers measure the weight of the infed products. These hoppers open or close according to the combination calculation result, and feed products to the collection chute or the booster hopper. The weigh/drive unit powers the open/close action of the pool, weigh, and booster hoppers. It also measures the weight of product in the weigh hoppers. The collection chutes collect products rejected by the weigh hopper or the booster hopper, and convey them to the discharge chute.
2 3
4 5 6
Radial trough Radial feeder (RF) Pool hopper (PH)
Weigh hopper (WH)
Weigh/drive unit (WDU)
Collection chute
2-6
2 INTRODUCTION
Table 2-2 Unit Descriptions (Continued)

No.
10 11 12 13 14 15
Name
Discharge chute Timing hopper (TH) (Optional) Timing hopper drive unit (Optional) Remote control unit (RCU) Printer Main power switch
The discharge chute collects product discharged from the collection chute and guide the product down into the timing hopper or the packer. The timing hopper temporally pools the product from the weigh hoppers and controls the timing of discharge to the packer. The timing hopper drive unit powers the open/close action of the timing hopper. The remote control unit contains the touch screen used to operate and monitor the weigher. Prints out setting data, weighing results, and statistical data. Turns on and off the power to the weigher.
2-7
2 INTRODUCTION
2.6
Operation Outline
This section describes the operation flow from the time the product is received from the infeed equipment to the time it is weighed, combination calculated, and discharged from the timing hopper.
Outline of the Product Flow and Combination Calculation.

1 2
7 8
Fig. 2-2 Operation Outline
1. Product is supplied to the inlet chute from the upstream infeed equipment. 2. Product is conveyed from the inlet chute to the dispersion table, and the dispersion table vibrates to convey product onto the radial troughs. 3. The radial troughs vibrate to convey product onto the pool hoppers. 4. The pool hoppers discharge product to the weigh hoppers as required. 5. Product is weighed in the weigh hoppers. 6. Select the weigh hoppers so that the weight is the closest to and not below the target weight. Then product is discharged from the selected hoppers. 7. Product is collected in the collection chute and discharged from the discharge chute. 8. If an optional timing hopper is installed, the timing hopper opens and product is drained on the drain request form the packer.
2-8

3.1 3.2 3.3 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Components and Functions of the Remote Control Unit (RCU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Operation Panel and Data Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.3.1 Operation Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 3.3.2 Data Entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 3.3.2.1 Entering Numeric Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 3.3.2.2 Entering English Alphabet Data, Numeral Data, and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 3.3.3 Correction after Data Entry and Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
<MEMO>
3
3.1
REMOTE CONTROL UNIT

Summary
This chapter describes the terminology and functions of the remote control unit and the operation outline and the displayed contents that are necessary for the operation.
WARNING
Be sure to read this chapter carefully before attempting operation.
NOTE Refer to "4 PRODUCTION" for the details on production method.
< Contents >

Meanings of the indications displayed on the operation panel of the remote control unit Description of the common operations of the remote control unit
< Intention >

To understand and master the basic and common operation procedures of the remote control unit
< Intended reader >

All personnel involved in operations with the weigher
3-1
3.2
Components and Functions of the Remote Control Unit (RCU)
This chapter describes the components and functions of the remote control unit (RCU) using the figure below.
1 3
Fig. 3-1 Remote Control Unit
Table 3-1 Functional Description of the Remote Control Unit

No.
1 2 3 4
Name
Operation panel Printer Main power switch Camera
Used to input settings and display data. Used to print out statistical data, product settings, etc. Used to turn ON and OFF the power supplied to the unit. Used to take photos.
3-2
3.3
Operation Panel and Data Entry
Enter data such as numerals, letters, and symbols on the operation panel. Enter data by displaying each setting menu whenever necessary.
3.3.1
Operation Panel
Fig. 3-2 Operation Panel
Table 3-2 Functions of the Operation Panel

No.
1 2 3
Name
Upper set key Menu key Status display
Function
It is always displayed at the top of the menu. Used to set the operating environment for the operation panel. The keys on the screen are box shaped to create a three-dimensional effect. Pressing these box portions will switch the screens and operate the weigher. The box for set value indication is also displayed with a plane view. The current operating status and error content are displayed in this part.
NOTE The above figure is an example. Menu keys and display area differ depending on each menu and operation level.
3-3
<Menu Keys>
Operation keys include the following keys as well as the normal keys. Table 3-3 Types and Displays of the Main Operation Keys
Types of keys
Lamp key
Examples of display
Lamp turns ON and OFF each time pressing this key. The functions of the key are effective when this lamp is ON. By pressing this key, the keyboard or ten-key is displayed. Enter letters and numerals via the keyboard and ten-keys. (Refer to 3.3.2 Data Entry.") The set letters and numerals are reflected on the key. The selection item list is displayed by pressing this key. Select and press either of the displayed keys, and the list closes. The selected item is reflected on the key. The pop-up list is displayed by pressing this key. Select and press either of the displayed keys, and the list closes. The shapes of key varies such as the Machine set key and Total select key. The pop-up list has a wide range such as operation key display and radio button display (the next item). Each key has a name, but the selection result may be displayed depending on the key. The selection item is displayed in button, and select one of them. The selected button is depressed and displayed in blue.
Content enter key
Drop-down list key
Pop-up key
Radio button
<Page display key>

When the operation screen is separated into pages, switch the pages by the following step. Table 3-4 Types and Displays of the Page Select Keys
Types of keys
Index
Examples of display
It is the item list such as a reserve setting on the right side on the screen. When there are many pages of screens, it is displayed in this style. The relevant screen is displayed when pressing any one. The names of keys are displayed with quotations. Ex: Press "Finish Prdct Setting."
Tab
When the pages of screens are few, the screen is displayed in tab. The relevant screen is displayed when pressing any one.
3-4
<Screen scrolling>
When there are many display items in a menu, the hidden part can be displayed by scrolling the screen. In this case, the scroll key and scroll bar are displayed. The scroll key and scroll bar are displayed in the upper/lower or right/left direction depending on the displayed screen.
Fig. 3-3 Scroll Display
Table 3-5 Key and Functional Description of the Scroll Display

No.
1 2 Scroll key . Scroll bar The screen is scrolled quickly when pressing it up/down (right/left). The length and location of the scroll bar shows the portion and position of the viewable screen to the whole screen.
Name
Display
The screen is scrolled in the key direction while pressing it.
3-5
3.3.2
Data Entry
Numeric data, product name, etc. are entered via the ten-key pad or the keyboard. The ten-key pad or the keyboard is displayed whenever data entry is required. Enter numeric data via the ten-key pad, and alphabets and numerals via the keyboard.
NOTE In this manual, "to set" refers to entering numerals, letters, or symbols via the ten-key pad or the keyboard then pressing the return key to register the entered data.
3.3.2.1
Entering Numeric Data
The ten-key pad is displayed when entering numeric data.
Fig. 3-4 Ten-key Pad
Table 3-6 Functional Description of the Ten-Key Pad

No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Name
Set item display area Display area CANCEL key BS key CLR key Return key Entry guide display area
Key
Displays the entered item. Displays the entered numeral. Cancels the data entry via the ten-key. Ends the ten-key without entering anything. Deletes one numeral in the display area each time the key is pressed. Clears all of the displayed numeric data. Sets the entered numeric data and returns to the previous menu. Displays the settable value range and the entry method.
To set numeric data via the ten-key pad, proceed as follows:
3-6
1. Press the numeric keys to enter the desired value. The entered value will appear on the display panel. 2. Press the return key .
The entered value will be registered. The ten-key pad will disappear.
3-7
3.3.2.2
Entering English Alphabet Data, Numeral Data, and Symbols
The keyboard will appear when entering numeric data, alphabetic data, and symbols. The alphabet keyboard is the keyboard displayed first.
<Keyboard>
Fig. 3-5 Keyboard
Table 3-7 Functional Description of the Keyboard

No.
1 2 3 4
Name
Setting item display Display panel CLR key BS key
Key
Displays the currently set item. Displays the entered letters. Clears all of the displayed data. Deletes one character each time the key is pressed.
Space key
Enters one space between characters.
Return key
Sets entered data and returns to the previous menu. Switches the characters on an identical key. The letters that can be entered are displayed in black. Switches upper and lower case. When the lamp of this key is ON, it is able to type in capital letters. Cancels the keyboard entry. By pressing this key, terminates the keyboard without entering anything.
7 8
SHIFT key CAPS key
CANCEL key
To perform setting via the keyboard, proceed as follows:

3-8
1. Press the keys of letters etc. to be entered. The entered letters etc. will appear on the display panel. 2. To enter a symbol, press the key to be entered after pressing the SHIFT key .
3. Press the return key
The entered letters, etc. will be registered. The keyboard will disappear.
3.3.3
Correction after Data Entry and Setting
To correct set numerals, letters, or symbols, repeat setting procedure via the ten-key pad or the keyboard.
3-9
3-10
4 PRODUCTION
4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Emergency Stop and Restart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Outline of Production Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Production Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Pre-Startup Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Weigher Power On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Control Unit Power ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Startup Assistant Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 Select Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 Zero Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 Starting Production . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 Stopping Production . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 Draining the Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 Weigher Power Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
4.4.1 4.4.2 4.4.3 4.4.4 4.4.5 4.4.6 4.4.7 4.4.8 4.4.9 4.4.10
4.5
Displays during Production. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
4.5.1 Combination Weight Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 4.5.1.1 Display selection Menu on the Production menu . . . . . . . 4-21
4.6
Production Pause and Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

Production Pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22 Production Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22 Every output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23 Current Total Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
4.6.1 4.6.2
4.7
Production Status Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
4.7.1 4.7.2
4.8
Printer Paper Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
<MEMO>
4 PRODUCTION
4
4.1
PRODUCTION
Summary
This chapter provides information on emergency stops, the outline of production sequence, and each operation performed during production.
WARNING
Read "3 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT" before attempting operation.
<Contents>
Outline of production sequence and pre-production procedure Adjustment procedures required during production
<Intention>
To understand and master the basic production procedure sequence and the adjustment procedure required during daily production
<Intended reader>
Operators System managers
4-1
4 PRODUCTION
4.2
Emergency Stop and Restart
Emergency stop and restart procedures are described below.
Procedure for an emergency stop

1. Turn off the main power switch (located on side of the RCU unit). The weigher will stop production. The screen of the operation panel will go out.
Restart
1. Clear the cause of the emergency stop. 2. Perform the start production sequence as usual.
4-2
4 PRODUCTION
4.3
Outline of Production Sequence
An outline of production operation is shown below. Refer to "4.4 Production Procedure" and the subsequent sections for details on the production procedures.
4.4.1 Pre-startup inspection
4.4.2 Weigher power on
4.4.3 Control Unit Power ON
(Normal Operation)
4.4.4Startup Assistant Function Selection
4.4.5 Select Preset

Select Preset
4.4.6 Zero adjustment
Zero adjustment
4.4.7 Starting production
Starting production
4.4.8 Stopping production

4.4.9 Draining the products
4.4.10 Weigher power off
Cleaning
4-3
4 PRODUCTION
4.4
4.4.1
Production Procedure
Pre-Startup Inspection
CAUTION
Before performing any maintenance or inspection work on the weigher, especially work which is not specifically indicated in this manual, shut off and lock the main power switch. The person performing the maintenance should keep the key in his possession while performing the work. ( 1.6 Drive Power Shutdown and Indication) If any parts are not securely mounted, they may fall out due to vibration caused during production, resulting in damage to the weigher or personal injury. If any problems are found during the pre-startup inspection, contact the maintenance personnel, and do not attempt to perform any operation before the problems are solved.
In order to remove the cause of trouble, perform a pre-startup inspection following the procedures described below before starting production. 1. Confirm that tools or objects irrelevant to production are not placed on top or in the vicinity of the weigher. 2. Confirm that the dispersion table is securely installed without a rattle. 3. Confirm that the dispersion table is not making contact with the radial troughs.
Fig. 4-2 Dispersion Table Partial View
4. Confirm that the radial troughs are not in contact with each other. 5. Confirm that the pool hopper, the weigh hopper and the timing hopper (optional) are securely installed (without rattle). 6. Confirm that the collection chutes are securely installed. 7. Confirm that the timing hopper and the drive unit are securely connected with the drive shaft. (Optional)
Fig. 4-3 Radial Trough Partial View
4-4
4 PRODUCTION
4.4.2
Weigher Power On
CAUTION
Be sure to turn on the main power switch at least 30 minutes before starting production to warm up and stabilize weighing. Weighing may not be stabilized depending on the situation.
Supplies the power to the weigher. 1. Turn on the main power switch. The power will be supplied to the weigher. 2. Wait at least 30 minutes.
4.4.3
Control Unit Power ON
Supplies the power to the weigher control unit.
1. Press the Power key
The power will be supplied to the control unit.
Fig. 4-5 Main Menu
4-5
4 PRODUCTION
4.4.4
Startup Assistant Function
The startup assistant function makes the whole procedure up to production easy by following the instructions on the screen. When not using the startup assistant function, follow the procedure in "4.4.5 Select Preset" to start the operation. 1. Press the startup assistant key .
The Start-up Assistant menu will appear.
Fig. 4-6 Main Menu
2. Cancels the start-up assistant function, and press the Cancel key Main menu. Press the Next key to return to the
to continue.
The Select Preset menu for Start-up Assistant appears. Press the blinking keys to perform the next operation. The general outline of the work on the Startup Assistant menu is displayed on the left side of screen. 3. Display the desired preset item by scrolling the screen using the scroll key or the scroll bar. 4. Select an item by pressing the preset item key. 5. Press the OK key .
Fig. 4-7 Start-up Assistant Menu
DThe WH Zero Adjustment menu for Startup Assistant appears.
4-6
4 PRODUCTION
NOTE The illustrations of weigh hopper are displayed in blue on the WH Zero Adjustment menu. Just after turning on the power, or when zero adjustment is not performed for 30 minutes or longer, the weigh hoppers are displayed in red. While weigh hoppers are displayed in red, it is not possible to proceed to the next step unless zero adjustment is performed.
6. Press the Start key
Zero adjustment for WH (weigh hopper) starts. The progress bar is displayed during zero adjustment.
NOTE When errors occur during zero adjustment, the illustrations of weigh hopper are displayed in red. In this case, press the Start
key again to perform zero adjustment.
The DF zero adjustment menu for Start-up Assistant appears.
NOTE The illustrations of dispersion table are displayed in blue on the DF Zero Adjustment menu. Just after turning on the power, or when zero adjustment is not performed for 30 minutes or longer, the dispersion table is displayed in red. While the dispersion table is displayed in red, it is not possible to proceed to the next step unless zero adjustment is performed.
4-7
4 PRODUCTION
Zero adjustment for the dispersion table starts. The progress bar is displayed during zero adjustment.
NOTE When errors occur during zero adjustment, the illustrations of dispersion table are displayed in red. In this case, press the Start
key again to perform zero adjustment.
If DF zero adjustment is completed normally, the Production Standby menu appears. 8. Press the Start key .
The equipment starts operation.
Fig. 4-13 Production Standby Menu
TIP
The start-up assistant function can be always used, but the setting menu differs depending on the previous status of the weigher. When start-up assistant function is started without selecting the weigher, the previous selection is applied.
4-8
4 PRODUCTION
4.4.5
Select Preset
Selects and calls up the preset product that is already memorized. This function saves the trouble of the product setting. 1. Press the picture part of the preset subject display on the Main menu. The Select Preset menu will appear.
Fig. 4-14 Main Menu
2. Press the desired preset number by the scroll key and scroll bar. 3. Press the Exit key .
The selected preset is called up, and returns to the Main menu.
Fig. 4-15 Select Preset Menu
< Switching the Display for the Select Preset Menu >
The Select Preset menu has the photo display or in the list display. Products can be selected visually from the photo display. In the list display, the displayed order can be changed according to the parameters such as the class No. and weight value.
4-9
4 PRODUCTION
1. Press the Slct Dsply key Preset menu.
on the Select
The display will be switched to the list display.
In the list, press one of the titles (Preset No., Product Classification No., Product Name, Target Weight, Speed, Dump Count, and Record Time). The order of preset data can be sorted on the basis of the selected row. For example, if the "Target value"is pressed, the preset data is displayed from the lighter target weight in the order.
Fig. 4-17 Select Preset Menu (List Display)
2. Press the Slct Dsply key
The display will be switched to the photo display.
Fig. 4-18 Select Preset Menu (List Display)
< Selecting the Preset No. Directly >

The Preset No. can be selected directly using the ten-key. It is convenient if the Preset No. is known, and the number is too large to quickly access by scrolling.
4-10
4 PRODUCTION
1. Press the Preset No. key Preset menu. The ten-key will appear.
on the Select
2. Enter the desired preset number. The ten-key will disappear, and the entered preset number will be selected.
4-11
4 PRODUCTION
4.4.6
Zero Adjustment
In order to ensure the accuracy of weighing, perform zero adjustment for the weigh hoppers and the dispersion table.
1. Press the Zero Adjust key
The Zero Adjustment menu will appear. All hoppers are selected and displayed in blue.
Fig. 4-20 Main Menu
Fig. 4-21 Zero Adjustment Menu
The message "Please wait a moment." will appear and zero adjustment will start.
Fig. 4-22 Zero Adjustment Menu (in the process)
4-12
4 PRODUCTION
Once zero adjustment is completed, the weight is displayed at each weight hopper key. 3. Confirm that each weigh hopper key display reads 0.00.1g.
NOTE Perform zero adjustment again when the weigh hopper does not read 0.00.1g.
Zero adjustment may not be performed appropriately within 30 minutes after turning on the power, or due to wind. Pressing each hopper on the menu can select/unselect the hopper.
Fig. 4-23 Zero Adjustment Menu (at the completion)
Follow up with the zero adjustment for the dispersion table.
<Zero adjustment for the dispersion table>
1. Press the Slct All DF key Adjustment menu.
in the Zero
The dispersion table is displayed in blue. 2. Confirm that no product is on the dispersion table.
4-13
4 PRODUCTION
The message "Please wait a moment." will appear and zero adjustment will start.
Fig. 4-26 Zero Adjustment Menu (in the process)
After completing zero adjustment, the weight will be displayed at the dispersion table key. 4. Confirm that the dispersion table key display reads 0.0g.
NOTE Perform zero adjustment again when the weigh hopper does not read 0.0g.
5. Press the Exit key
Fig. 4-27 Zero Adjustment Menu (at the completion)
The Main menu will appear.
4-14
4 PRODUCTION
4.4.7
Starting Production
Start the weigh production.
Production will start and the Production menu will appear.
TIP
When supplying the products automatically by operating simultaneously with this weigher, the product supply starts by pressing the Infeed Control key. For the symbols displayed on the Production menu, refer to "Chapter 6." For the procedure of production pause, refer to "4.6 Production Pause and Restart."
Fig. 4-28 Main Menu
CAUTION
Do not close hoppers forcibly when the hoppers are open. It may damage the drive unit. When the main power is turned off when the hoppers are open or the hoppers remain open due to blackout, refer to "11.5 Handling Drive unit." for the corrective actions.
4-15
4 PRODUCTION
4.4.8
Stopping Production
Stops weighing of the products.
1. Press Infeed Control key Control is ON.
when Infeed
The Infeed Control key is turned OFF, and the product supply is paused.
Fig. 4-29 Production Menu
2. Press the Stop key Production will stop.
3. Press the Exit key Returns to Main menu.
NOTE To change the product drain and preset subject after pausing the production,
press the Exit key , and return to Main menu before the operation.
4-16
4 PRODUCTION
4.4.9
Draining the Products
Drain the products remaining in the weigher after stopping production.
<Draining the Products>
1. Press the Drain key
The Drain menu will appear. The product draining will start.
Fig. 4-32 Main Menu
2. After completing the product draining, press the Drain key Drain stops.
Fig. 4-33 Drain Menu
It will return to the Main menu.
Fig. 4-34 DRAIN Menu
4-17
4 PRODUCTION
4.4.10 Weigher Power Off

Shut off the power to the weigher.
1. Press the Power key
Control system power will be turned OFF.
Fig. 4-35 Main Menu
2. Turn off the main power switch. The screen of the operation panel will go out. The power feeding to the weigher is cut off.
<Cleaning>
Clean the weigher after the operation.
4-18
4 PRODUCTION
4.5
Displays during Production
The weight display menu during production can be switched to one of the following menus by selecting the tab: Combination Weight, Feeder Adjustment, Timing Adjustment, Total Data, and Weight Display. ( Refer to 6.6 Production Menu.) In the combination weight menu, the display can be switched between the combination weight and the weight using the select display pop-up keys ( Refer to 4.5.1.1 Display selection Menu on the Production menu.). Along with the combination weight value, the combination weight contains the head weight, the state of the head, and the preset details. In the Weight display, only the combination weight value is displayed. Combination calculation ( Refer to 6.6 Production Menu.)
Refer to the corresponding section for description of the following functions. Feeder Adjustment ( Timing Adjustment ( Total Data ( Refer to 6.12 Feeder Adjustment Menu.) Refer to 6.13 Timing Adjustment Menu.)
Refer to 6.11 Total Menu.) Refer to 6.6.5 Weight Display Menu.)
Weight Display (
4.5.1
Combination Weight Menu
Combination weight menu is displayed by pressing the combination weight tab on the production menu.
Fig. 4-37 Combination weight Menu
4-19
4 PRODUCTION
Table 4-1 Descriptions of the Combination Weight Menu

No.
1 Weight display
Name
The combined and selected weight value is displayed in each channel. The combination result is displayed in the lamp color. Green lamp: Proper weight Yellow lamp: Overweight Red lamp: Underweight Displays the combination and the weight statuses. : Head which was weighed and stabled. : Head which participated in combination calculation. The circle colors indicate the stability: green (most stable), white (more stable), and yellow (stable). : Empty head Blank: Head whose weight is unstable. : Head in auto zero adjustment. : Error head (error caused overload or jam) : Head which is set not to participate.
Weigh hopper display
3 4 5
Head display guide Select preset Select display pop-up key
Displays the head symbols in the flow display. Displays the selected preset item. Selects display method either from standard or zoom display. Standard display icon and zoom icon are displayed. The selected method is displayed by pressing either icon.
4-20
4 PRODUCTION
4.5.1.1
Display selection Menu on the Production menu
Either the combination weight or the weight display can be selected on the production menu. Press the display selection pop-up key on the production menu, and select the desired menu.
Fig. 4-38 Display selection menu on the production menu
Table 4-2 Operation keys and display examples of the production menu
No. Name of the key Display Description of the displayed menu
Selects the combination weight menu.
Combination weight display key
Fig. 4-39 Combination weight menu

Selects the weight display menu.
Weight display key
Fig. 4-40 Weight display menu
4-21
4 PRODUCTION
4.6
Production Pause and Restart
Follow the procedure described below to stop (pause) and then restart during production.
4.6.1
Production Pause
1. Press the Stop key
The Stop key the Start key
will be dimmed, and will appear.
Production will stop (pause).
4.6.2
Production Restart
1. When restarting the production, press the Start key .
The Start key the Stop key
will be dimmed, and will appear.
Production will restart.
4-22
4 PRODUCTION
4.7
Production Status Output
Every output and current total output can be performed during production if necessary.
4.7.1
Every output
NOTE Setting of every output is accessibly by Site Engineer or personnel in higher levels.
Every output allows the combination weight value in production. To perform every output, follow the procedure below:
<Operation procedure>
1. Press the Total data tab on the Production menu. The Total data menu appears.
2. Press the Total selection pop-up key. Total selection pop-up menu appears.
Fig. 4-44 Total data menu
4-23
4 PRODUCTION
3. Press the Total selection key The Total selection menu appears.
Fig. 4-45 Total selection pop-up menu
4.
Select "Yes" on the every combination result output radio button. With this status, output is performed once in every twice weighing. If every output is not required, select "NO" on the every combination result output radio button to cancel every output.
NOTE Turning off the power switch cancels "Every output."
4.7.2
Current Total Output
Current total output allows printing or file output of the total of the currently selected product data. To perform the current total output, follow the procedure below.
NOTE Printing or File output can be set on "Destination ID." (
Refer to 6.3.5.3Destination ID.)
The output files are binary file format data. Open them in the text editor or other applications.
4-24
4 PRODUCTION
<Operation procedures>
1. Press the Total data tab on the Production menu. The Total data menu appears.
2. Press the Output key. Data output starts.
4-25
4 PRODUCTION
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
--------------------Total data : 12 --------------------Preset number : 2 Date : 2004/8/26 Start time 12:33 Stop Time 13:23 --- C1 total --Product code : 02 Product name: Candy Proper weight : 228 Target weight : 50 g Total value : 11958 Kg Mean value : 52.4 g Standard deviation : 2.667 g Maximum weight : 57 g Minimum weight : 50 g Weight range : 7 g PW mean value : 4.74 g PW standard deviatio : 0.00 g PW maximum weight : 5.90 g PW minimum weight : 4.14 g Parent 1 total value : 0.0 Kg --------------------47 0 0 48 0 0 49 0 0 50 *****6 102 51 7 14 52 6 12 53 8 15 54 *3 25 (Continues to the right side)
(Continued from the left side) 55 7 14 56 9 17 57 *6 29 58 0 0 59 0 0 60 0 0 61 0 0 62 0 0 63 0 0 64 0 0 65 0 0 66 0 0 67 0 0 68 0 0 69 0 0 70 0 0 71 0 0 72 0 0 73 0 0 74 0 0 The number of * = 18 --------------------Number of underweight : 12 Number of overweight : 83 Number of overscale : 0 Number of rejected products after rechecking:42 Number of overweight discharge : 0 Number of overscale discharge : 0 Total value of overweight: 0 Kg Number of times of metal mixture: 0 ON time 0:05 OFF time 0:44 LOW time 0:00
11
Fig. 4-49 Current Total Output (example)
Table 4-3 List of Output items

Num ber
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Name
Product code Product name Proper weight Target weight Total value Mean value Standard deviation Maximum weight Minimum weight Weight range Quantity per * mark Total discharged weight
Remarks
Number of times of proper weight discharge
(Maximum value) - (Minimum value) The weighing results are weight value, histogram, and number of weighing times are displayed from the left. The value of the histogram indicates (*10%). When * =18 and the number of weighing times are 45 times, for example, "**5" is displayed.
4-26
4 PRODUCTION
4.8
Printer Paper Loading
When the message "printer: no paper" appears in the lower part of the RCU display, replenish the roll by following the procedure below. 1. Press down on the printer cover to open the cover.
Fig. 4-50 Printer External View
2. Pull the fixed lever toward, and press down the printer unit.
Fig. 4-51 Fixed Lever
Fig. 4-52 Printer Unit
3. Raise the printer head lever. The printer head will stand upright.
Fig. 4-53 Printer Internal View
4-27
4 PRODUCTION
4. Press open the roll holder clips and remove the core of the old roll. 5. Insert a new roll into the clips in the direction shown on the right.
Fig. 4-54 Paper Roll Loading
6. Insert the end of the paper into the printer. 7. Feed the paper and pull out about 1cm from the printer head.
Fig. 4-55 Printer Paper Threading
8. Press the printer head lever. The printer head will return to the lowered position. 9. Press up the printer unit. 10. Shut the printer cover. Paper roll replacement will be complete.
Fig. 4-56 Printer Internal View
4-28
5 NEW PRODUCTS
5.1 5.2 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 Presetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5-2 5-4 5-5 5-5 5-8 5-9
5.2.1 Setting Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.2 Registration Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.3 Preset Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.3.1 Product Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.3.2 Setting the Machine performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.3.3 Setting the Weight Value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3
Preset data Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
<MEMO>
5 NEW PRODUCTS
5
5.1
NEW PRODUCTS
Summary
This chapter describes the sequence and procedure for registering a new product.
CAUTION
Be sure to read Chapter 1 through Chapter 4 carefully before attempting operation.
<Contents>
Menus for setting parameters for different products
<Intention>
To understand and master the procedures for setting product data when weighing and producing a new product.
<Intended reader>
System managers
5-1
5 NEW PRODUCTS
5.2
5.2.1
Presetting
Setting Contents
The items and contents set in the Preset menu are show in Table 5-1 "The List of Product Setting Content."
CAUTION
Each setting varies with nature, characteristics, and setting environment of the products. Thus, the adjustment should be made while checking production conditions.
TIP
Table 5-1 The "initial values" listed in "Table 5-1 The List of Product Setting Content" are the reference values previously set on the weigher. The "setting example" in the table shows the values to be set when 90g of potato chips is measured. ( to 5.2.3 Preset Procedure.) Refer
Table 5-1 The List of Product Setting Content

Setting item
Product name Product code Product category Picture selection
Contents
Use this function to set the name of the product to be weighed. Use this function to set the code No. of the product to be weighed. Use this function to set the product category of the product to be weighed. Use this function to select a picture. Without a picture data, the preset number will be displayed. Use this function to take a picture of product. Use this function to set the number of times 60 to discharge products per minute. When the target weight is large or bulky 1 products are infed, the products will be divided to multiple sets and discharged several times to prevent them from clogging in the downstream equipment (e.g. packer). This sets the number of times to discharge. Controls the target weight at a constant OFF interval to ensure the average discharge weight comes close to the target weight. This control is set to either "ON" or "OFF."
Initial value
Setting example
C1:Potato chips 01 A100
Camera Speed Dump count
70 1
Average control
OFF
5-2
5 NEW PRODUCTS
Table 5-1 The List of Product Setting Content (Continued)

Setting item
Packer interlock system number selection Section division number select Auto feeder target
Contents
Sets the interlock mode between the weigher 1 and the packer. Selects a division pattern of section in order 2 to select participating machine number. There are eight division patterns. Sets the number of heads of the weigh hoppers to be drained in order to obtain the target weight value. 3.8
Initial value
1 2
Setting example
3.8
Priority participance
Sets the cycle of combination calculation to 30 give priority to participate in combination calculation to the heads which have not discharged products. Sets the range that can adjust the operation amplitude automatically when setting the AFD to auto. Sets the range that can adjust the operation time automatically when setting the AFD to auto. Sets the multiplying factor for the feeder time set on the FEEDER ADJUST menu. 1
30
AFD Auto adjustment limit amp AFD Auto adjustment limit time Feeder multiply Hopper action Photo SW Shutter drive Feeder adjustment
1 0 Off Off AFD mode: Manual Amplitude: 50 Time: 25 Target weight: 500 IS-DS: 0 IS-TH1: 0 IS-WH: 0 WH-PH: 190 PH-RF: 130 STAGGER: 0 WH-BH: 60 BH-WH: 100 AFD mode: Manual Amplitude: 50 Time: 25 DF weight: 500 IS-DS: 0 IS-TH1: 0 IS-WH: 0 WH-PH: 190 PH-RF: 130 STAGGER: 0 WH-BH: 60 BH-WH: 100
Selects the open/close parameter for the pool 0 and weigh hoppers. Select On with a phototube, and select Off without a phototube. Off
Select On with a shutter drive, and select Off Off without a shutter drive. The amount of product supplied to the pool hopper(s), radial trough(s), and dispersion table is determined by setting the amplitude and the operation time of the radial and dispersion feeders and the DF weight. Sets the open/close timing of each hopper.
Timing adjustment
Target weight Extended upper limit
Sets the weight of the products to be discharged from the weigher to the packer.
C1:0
C1:90 0
Accepts a specified number of products as 0 proper weight products even though they are once over the upper weight limit. Sets the upper limit of the proper weight. Sets the lower limit of the proper weight in units of grams when the average control is used. 0 0
Upper weight limit Lower weight limit
3 0
5-3
5 NEW PRODUCTS
5.2.2
Registration Sequence
The product base registration sequence is described here. For details on the operations and procedures, refer to the next section. The items marked with "*" in the following are of menus with the initial values already registered. For the initial value of each item, refer to "5.2.1 Setting Contents." Refer to "6.10 Preset Menu" for details on each item.
Setting the Product( 5.2.3.1Product Setting) Product name, product code, product category, picture selection, photo shoot
Setting the Weigher( 5.2.3.2Setting the Machine performance) Speed, dump count*, average control*, packer interlock system number select*, section division number select*
Setting the Item* Auto feeder target, priority participance, AFD automatic adjustment strength width, AFD automatic adjustment time range, feeder multiply, hopper action characteristic number, edge photoelectric tube, edge shutter
Other Settings* Stable time
Setting the Feeder Value *
Setting the Timing Value *
Setting the Weight Value ( 5.2.3.3Setting the Weight Value) Target weight value, upper/upper weight value, upper weight value, lower weight value
Completing the reservation setting
5-4
5 NEW PRODUCTS
5.2.3
Preset Procedure
The procedure for the registration of the setting examples shown in "5.2.1 Setting Contents" is described here. The values in parentheses in the following procedures are the values shown in "Table 5-1 The List of Product Setting Content." The preset procedure is performed at the Site Engineer level or the Installation level.
NOTE The setting procedure for the initial value is not provided. Please refer to "6 FUNCTION OF THE OPERATION PANEL" for all setting procedures.
5.2.3.1
Product Setting
<Purpose>
To set the product name, code number, and class number to be weighed.
1. Press the Preset key
The Preset menu will appear.
Fig. 5-1 Main Menu
2. Press the Product Name key . The keyboard will appear.
Fig. 5-2 Preset Menu (Product)
5-5
5 NEW PRODUCTS
3. Set the product name (POTATO CHIPS). The Preset menu will appear.
NOTE If the setting is changed, Cancel key

can be operated. Press Cancel key to cancel the setting. If Exit key is pressed, the setting content is entered.
Fig. 5-3 Keyboard
4. Press the Product Code key. The keyboard will appear.
5. Set the Product Code. (01)
Fig. 5-5 Keyboard
5-6
5 NEW PRODUCTS
6. Press the Product Category key. The keyboard will appear.
7. Set the product category. (A100)
Fig. 5-7 Keyboard
NOTE The product code and product category can be entered via the keyboard.
Selecting photos
1. Press the photo selection drop-down key. The photo selection drop-down menu appears.
Fig. 5-8 Preset menu
5-7
5 NEW PRODUCTS
2. Press the desired photo. The selected photo appears on the display screen.
TIP
Selected photos are reflected on each of the menus: Main menu, Production menu, Photo display menu of Presetting, and Presetting menu. To take photos of the products, refer to "Taking photos of product" of "6.10Preset Menu".
Fig. 5-9 Preset menu
5.2.3.2
Setting the Machine performance
<Purpose>
Use this function to set the weighing count per minute. Performs the dump count, average control, packer interlock system number selection, and section division number select when necessary. 1. Press the Machine tab. The Machine menu appears.
Fig. 5-10 Preset Menu
5-8
5 NEW PRODUCTS
2. Press the Speed key. The ten-key pad appears.
Fig. 5-11 Preset Menu (Machine)
3. Setting the speed. (70) The value is overwritten on the current value.
Fig. 5-12 Ten-Key pad
5.2.3.3
Setting the Weight Value
<Purpose>
To set the weight value and acceptable weighed value to be weighed on the weigher. 1. Press "Weight Setting" on the right side on the menu. The Weight Setting menu will appear.
5-9
5 NEW PRODUCTS
2. Press the Target Weight key. The ten-key pad will appear.
Fig. 5-14 Preset Menu (Weight Setting)
3. Set the target weight. (90) The ten-key pad will disappear.
4. Press the Upper Weight Limit key. The ten-key pad will appear.
5-10
5 NEW PRODUCTS
5. Set the upper weight limit. (3) The ten-key pad will disappear.
NOTE When the preset number is changed on the preset menu, the message screen is displayed after pressing the "Return" key. Pressing the "Yes" key confirms the setting with the selected preset number.
Fig. 5-19 Confirmation screen
5-11
5 NEW PRODUCTS
5.3
Preset data Management

to store the preset details
After completing the preset procedure, press the "Return" key automatically in the main unit memory.
Preset details of a preset number can be copied to another preset number. Backup or further setting of preset details is possible by copying to the memory card. Created preset details can be recorded by printing or file output. For the preset data management, refer to the following items. Selecting and copying the preset data ( Refer to 6.14.3.2.1 Preset Manager and Copy.) Refer to 6.14.3.2.2
Copying all preset data (from the memory to a card, or a card to the memory) ( Coping all presets.) Initializing unnecessary preset data ( Initializing all preset data (
Refer to 6.14.3.2.3 Selection and Initialization of Preset.)
Refer to 6.14.3.2.4 Initialization of all presets.) Refer to 7.2.1 Copy and edition of
Copying registered product data to create new product data ( registered product data.) Printing or File output of the preset details (
Refer to 6.10.6 Output the Preset .)
5-12

6.1 6.2 6.3 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Operation Keys and Operation Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Upper Setting Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
6.3.1 Message Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 6.3.2 Start-up Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12 6.3.3 Selecting a Language. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 6.3.4 Selecting an Operation Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14 6.3.4.1 Switching to the Operator Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 6.3.4.2 Switching to the Site Engineer Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 6.3.4.3 Switching to the Installation Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16 6.3.5 Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18 6.3.5.1 Screen Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19 6.3.5.2 Password Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20 6.3.5.3 Destination ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21 6.3.6 Setting the Date & Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24 6.3.7 Help function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
6.4 6.5 6.6
Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27 Zero Adjustment Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29 Production Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
6-32 6-33 6-34 6-34 6-35 6-36
6.6.1 Combination Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6.1.1 Display Selection Menu on Production Menu . . . . . . . . . . 6.6.2 Feeder Adjust Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6.3 Timing Adjut Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6.4 Total Data Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6.5 Weight Display Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.7 6.8
Drain Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37 Full Open Lock Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39

Full Open Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40 Feeder Adjust Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41 Photo Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42 List Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
6.8.1 6.8.2
6.9
Select Preset Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
6.9.1 6.9.2
6.10 Preset Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44

6.10.1 Product Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
6.10.1.1 Product Tab Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10.1.2 Machine Tab Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10.1.3 Item Tab Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10.1.4 Others Tab Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10.2 Feeder Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10.3 Timing Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10.4 Weight Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10.4.1 Target Weight Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10.4.2 Upper Weight Limit Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10.4.3 Lower Weight Limit Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10.5 Changing the Preset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10.6 Output the Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11.1 6.11.2 6.11.3 6.11.4 6.11.5 6.11.6 Current Total Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X-bar Chart Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transitional Data of Weigher Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Participation Data per Head Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Total Setting Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation Log Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-45 6-48 6-49 6-51 6-52 6-54 6-55 6-55 6-56 6-56 6-57 6-58 6-61 6-66 6-67 6-68 6-69 6-70
6.11 Total Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60
6.12 Feeder Adjustment Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-71

6.12.1 Feeder Adjustment Menu Display Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-74 6.12.2 Auto Adjustment Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-76 6.12.3 Auto Adjustment range Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-81
6.13 Timing Adjustment Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-83 6.14 Machine Set Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-85
6.14.1 Manual Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-86 6.14.1.1 Weigh Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-86 6.14.1.2 Combination Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-89 6.14.1.3 Vibration Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-90 6.14.2 Self-diagnosis Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-91 6.14.2.1 Device Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-91 6.14.2.2 Input / Output junction signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-92 6.14.2.3 Network Analyze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93 6.14.2.4 Program number display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-95 6.14.2.5 Test Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-96 6.14.3 Layout Setting / Data Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-99 6.14.3.1 Layout Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-99 6.14.3.2 Preset Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-100 6.14.3.2.1 Preset Manager and Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-100 6.14.3.2.2 Coping all presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-102 6.14.3.2.3 Selection and Initialization of Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-104 6.14.3.2.4 Initialization of all presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-105 6.14.3.3 Machine Set edition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-107 6.14.3.3.1 Selection and copy of the Machine Set items . . . . . . . 6-108 6.14.3.3.2 Coping all Machine Set items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-109 6.14.3.3.3 Selection and initialization of the Machine Set item . . 6-111 6.14.3.3.4 Initialization of all Machine Set items . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-112
6.14.4 Parameters Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.14.4.1 Weight details setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.14.4.2 Combination details setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.14.4.3 Section division setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.14.5 Weigher setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.14.5.1 Participating Machine Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.14.5.2 AFD Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.14.6 Peripheral devise setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.14.6.1 Packer interlock specification setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.14.6.1.1 Packer Interlock Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.14.6.1.2 Ring Shutter Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.14.6.1.3 Reject Timing Hopper Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.14.6.1.4 Timing Hopper Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.14.6.2 Feeder Details Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-114 6-114 6-116 6-118 6-119 6-119 6-120 6-121 6-121 6-122 6-123 6-125 6-125 6-126
<MEMO>
6
6.1
FUNCTION OF THE OPERATION PANEL

Summary
This chapter describes the functions of the operation panel required for operating the weigher. There are different keys to be displayed on the operation panel: to enter and set numeral values or letters via ten-key or keyboard, to select items via pop-up list, drop-down list, or radio button, and to switch the menu or display method. In this chapter, the function of each key will be described on the list. In addition, for the keys to switch the settings or operate the weigher, the operating procedures will be explained in details.
WARNING
Be sure to read "3 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT" carefully before attempting operation.
CAUTION
Refer to "4 PRODUCTION" for the operating procedures of the remote control unit and the production procedures.
<Contents>
Functions of each menu
<Intention>
To understand the functions of and operating procedures for each menu, and to understand and master advanced operations
<Intended reader>
6-1
6.2
Operation Keys and Operation Levels
NOTE Some of above-mentioned keys may not be displayed depending on the state of the machine or customers specification.
Operation Key Message Board Information display key Startup assistant key Language select key Operation level select key Control panel key Screen Control Backlight Saver BL Saver On Tim Touch Panel Wallpaper Characters Password Set Site Engineer level Installation level Maint Service level Destination ID Destination ID Access Address E-mail Setting Exit key DATE & TIME key Help key Zero Adjst key WH key DFkey Slct All WH key Slct All DF key Start key Exit key Drain key Auto Zero key Infeed Control key Drain STOP key Drain START key Exit key Weight Display tab Feeder Adjust tab Live/C.G. switch tab DF key RF RF Time lamp key RF AMP lamp key HEAD Me... lamp key
Operator Level
Installation Operator Site Engineer Enginer
Reference 6.3.1 6.3 6.3.2 6.3.3 6.3.4 6.3.5 6.3.5 6.3.5.1 6.3.5.1 6.3.5.1 6.3.5.1 6.3.5 6.3.5.2 6.3.5.2 6.3.5.2 6.3.5 6.3.5.3 6.3.5.3 6.3.5 6.3.6 6.3 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.7 6.7 6.7 6.7 6.7 6.7 6.7 6.13 6.13 6.13 6.13 6.13 6.13 6.13
* * * * *
* * * * *
Maintenance level
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Maintenance level
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
6-2
Operation Key Feeder Adjust tab SECTION Me... lamp key Increase key Decrease key Feeder Setting pop-up key Graph display switch key Live/C.G. switch tab Timing Adjust tab Full Open key Unit Select tab DF key RF key PH key WH key Feeder Adjust tab Close key Open key Exit key Select preset key Preset No. key Slct Dsply key Exit key Preset key Preset change key Preset No. direct select key Finish Prdct Setting Product tab Product Name key Product Code key Product Category key Photo select key Camera key Machine tab Speed key Dump Count key Average Control button Interlock Parameter Number drop-down key Section Parameter Number key Item tab Auto Feed Target key Disch. Priority Count key
AFD Auto adjustment limit amp key AFD Auto adjustment limit time key
Operator Level
Reference 6.13 6.13 6.13 6.13 6.13 6.13 6.14 6.8 6.8 6.8 6.8 6.8 6.8 6.8 6.8 6.8 6.8 6.9 6.9 6.9 6.9 6.10 6.10 6.10 6.10.1 6.10.1.1 6.10.1.1 6.10.1.1 6.10.1.1 6.10.1.1 6.10.1.1 6.10.1.2 6.10.1.2 6.10.1.2 6.10.1.2 6.10.1.2 6.10.1.2 6.10.1.3 6.10.1.3 6.10.1.3 6.10.1.3 6.10.1.3 6.10.1.3 6.10.1.3 6.10.1.3 6.10.1.3 6.10.1.4 6.10.1.4 6.10.2 6.10.2 6.10.2 6.10.2 6.10.2 6.10.2 6.10.2 6.10.2 6.10.2 6.12.1
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Feed Multiplier key Hopper Action Parameter Number drop-down key Photo SW button Shutter Drive button Others tab Stable Time key Feeder Adjustment RF key DF key Time key AMP key Initial Value key Optimal value key Increase key Decrease key Feeder Setting pop-up key
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
6-3
Operation Key Preset key Timing Adjustment

Timing Adjustment items key
Operator Level
Reference 6.14 6.14 6.14 6.10.4 6.10.4 6.10.4 6.10.4 6.10.4 6.10 6.10 4.4 6.6 6.6 6.6 6.6 6.6 6.6 6.13 6.13 6.13 6.13 6.13 6.13 6.13 6.13 6.13 6.13 6.13 6.6 6.6 6.6 4.4 6.11 6.11 6.11 6.11 6.11 6.11 6.11 6.11 6.11 6.11 6.11 6.11 6.11 6.11 6.11 6.11 6.11
Enter Time key Weight Setting

Extended Upper Limit key
Upper Weight Limit Target Weight key Lower Weight Limit key Cancel key Exit key Power key Start key Feeder optimal value registration key Infeed Control key Weight Display tab Combination tab FEEDER tab Live/C.G switch key DF key RF Key RF Time lamp key RF AMP lamp key HEAD Me... lamp key SECTION Me... lamp key Increase key Decrease key
Lader chart switch arrow key Feeder setting pop-up key
Timing Adjust tab Total Data tab Weight Display tab Stop key Select Total pop-up key Total Log drop-down key Print key Exit key Current Total/Histogram key Total Log drop-down key X-bar chart key Transition display for weigher key Select Item key Status display for each head key Select Item key Total Setting key Operation Log key Error Stop Log Warning Log Machine Operation Log Key Operation Log
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
6-4
Operation Key Machine setting pop-up key (continued) Self-diagnosis Index (continued) Program number display tab Print key Test drive tab Hopper key All WH key RF key PF key WH key Start drive key Stop drive key Display Setting / Data edition Index Menu layout Setting tab The first Machine Display Place Setting key Preset edition tab Initialization key Copy source selection drop-down key Copy destination selection drop-down key Copy source preset key Copy destination preset key Copy key All selection key Machine setting Edition Tab Initialization key Copy source selection drop-down key Copy destination selection drop-down key Copy source preset selection key Copy destination preset selection key Copy key All selection key Parameter Setting Index Weigh details setting tab Weigh radio button Empty determination key Stability determination weight key Stability determination comparing key Auto zero acceptable value key Filter number selection drop-down key Combination details Setting Tab Correction value key Correction value auto updating Radio button Zero error radio button PH, WH, BH and Hopper error radio button Overscale error radio button Error nonparticipation Head key Overweight error stop key Every stable head check radio button Recheck error radio button TH, DTH, RS, and Hopper error radio button Section division Setting Tab Parameter Selection key MIN Head number key MAX Head number key Delete key
Operator Level Reference

nstallation Operator Site Engineer Enginer
* * *
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
6.14 6.14.2 6.14.2.4 6.14.2.4 6.14.2.5 6.14.2.5 6.14.2.5 6.14.2.5 6.14.2.5 6.14.2.5 6.14.2.5 6.14.2.5 6.14.3 6.14.3.1 6.14.3.1 6.14.3.2 6.14.3.2 6.14.3.2 6.14.3.2 6.14.3.2 6.14.3.2 6.14.3.2 6.14.3.2 6.14.3.3 6.14.3.3 6.14.3.3 6.14.3.3 6.14.3.3 6.14.3.3 6.14.3.3 6.14.3.3 6.14.4 6.14.4.1 6.14.4.1 6.14.4.1 6.14.4.1 6.14.4.1 6.14.4.1 6.14.4.1 6.14.4.2 6.14.4.2 6.14.4.2 6.14.4.2 6.14.4.2 6.14.4.2 6.14.4.2 6.14.4.2 6.14.4.2 6.14.4.2 6.14.4.2 6.14.4.3 6.14.4.3 6.14.4.3 6.14.4.3 6.14.4.3
6-5
Operation Key Machine setting pop-up key (continued) Peripheral device Setting Index Packer Interlock Specification Setting Tab Parameter number selection drop-down key Packer Interlock Setting Index Drain Signal On Time key
Interlock signal radio button in timely weighing Drain signal radio button in timely weighing
Operator Level
Site nstallation Engineer Enginer
Reference
Interlock pull-down key

Interlock signal radio button in manual operation Drain signal radio button in manual operation
Ring Shutter Index Use Radio button Parameter selection drop-down key RS drop-down key MIN Head number key MAX Head number key Pool radio button in timely weighing Cycle pool radio button EXC number Selection drop-down key EXC port number drop-down key Feed direction radio button Steps key from WH Reject Timing hopper Index Use Radio button Parameter Selection drop-down key DTH drop-down key MIN Head number key MAX Head number key Pool radio button in timely weighing Cycle pool radio button EXC number Selection drop-down key EXC port number drop-down key Feed direction radio button Steps key from WH Timing hopper Index Use Radio button Parameter Selection drop-down key TH drop-down key MIN Head number key MAX Head number key Pool radio button in timely weighing Cycle pool radio button EXC number Selection drop-down key EXC port number drop-down key Feed direction radio button Steps key from WH Feeder Details Setting Tab Feeder number key Feeder number selection drop-down key MIN Head number key MAX Head number key Feed control radio button Feed control holdup time key Low product Detection time key
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
6.14.6 6.14.6.1 6.14.6.1.1 6.14.6.1.1 6.14.6.1.1 6.14.6.1.1 6.14.6.1.1 6.14.6.1.1 6.14.6.1.1 6.14.6.1.1 6.14.6.1.2 6.14.6.1.2 6.14.6.1.2 6.14.6.1.2 6.14.6.1.2 6.14.6.1.2 6.14.6.1.2 6.14.6.1.2 6.14.6.1.2 6.14.6.1.2 6.14.6.1.2 6.14.6.1.2 6.14.6.1.3 6.14.6.1.3 6.14.6.1.3 6.14.6.1.3 6.14.6.1.3 6.14.6.1.3 6.14.6.1.3 6.14.6.1.3 6.14.6.1.3 6.14.6.1.3 6.14.6.1.3 6.14.6.1.3 6.14.6.1.4 6.14.6.1.4 6.14.6.1.4 6.14.6.1.4 6.14.6.1.4 6.14.6.1.4 6.14.6.1.4 6.14.6.1.4 6.14.6.1.4 6.14.6.1.4 6.14.6.1.4 6.14.6.1.4 6.14.6.2 6.14.6.2 6.14.6.2 6.14.6.2 6.14.6.2 6.14.6.2 6.14.6.2 6.14.6.2
6-6
6.3
Upper Setting Bar
The upper setting bar is displayed at the upper part of the menu, and it is able to set the basic operating environment.
Fig. 6-1 Upper Setting Bar (EX: Main Menu)
Table 6-1 Operating Keys at Upper Setting Bar

No. Name Display Function Referen ce
6.3.1 6.3.2 6.3.3 6.3.4 6.3.5 6.3.6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Message Board Information display key Startup assistant key Language select key Operation level select key Control panel key DATE & TIME key
Displays the Message Board. Displays Instruction Manual and other information of this weigher. Displays the Startup Assistant menu. Selects a language. Switches the operation level. Sets the screen control, password, and data output location. Sets the date and the time. Displays descriptions of each key. The key blinks by pressing the HELP key. Then, when pressing a key, the description of the key function is displayed. The HELP is closed when touching the screen while HELP is displayed.
Help key
6.3.7
6-7
6.3.1
Message Board
The message board is the function to handwrite free notes on the operation panel menu. Any memos and messages, such as a memo about operation or a message to the operator who is taking the next turn, can be freely written down. Once memo is entered, the message board key blinks. The key blinks even while displaying the other menus, and the presence or absence of the memo data can be recognized at a glance.
CAUTION
Be sure to use your fingertip to enter data. The operation panel will be damaged when using a pen or a pointed tool.
NOTE The display may vary depending on the operation speed or writing pressure. Small letters may not be displayed clearly.
Fig. 6-2 Message Board Menu
Table 6-2 Names and Functions of the Keys on the Message Board Menu
No.
1
Name
Line thickness key
Display
Selects the line thickness. : Thick
Function
: Medium
: Thin
Line color key
Selects the line color (red, blue, black).
6-8
Table 6-2 Names and Functions of the Keys on the Message Board Menu (Continued)
No.
3 4 5 Eraser key Erase All key Transmit key
Name
Display
Function
Erase the parts followed with this key. Erase the entire displayed memo data. Transmits the message board by e-mail.
Exit key
Returns to the previous menu.
<Usage>
1. Press the message board key on a menu.
2. The Massage Board menu will appear.
Fig. 6-3 Main Menu
3. Selects the line type and line color by each select key. 4. Enter letters with your fingertip. The entered letters are displayed. The Message memo key blinks.
Fig. 6-4 Message Memo Menu
6-9
<When erasing a part of a message>

5. Press the Eraser key 6. Trace the part to be erased. The traced part is erased. .
NOTE Even if the entire message is erased by the eraser key, the memo data cannot be erased entirely and the messege board key cannot be released from blinking. The memo data can be erased entirely by using the erase all key, and the message board key can be released from blinking. (See the next page)
<When erasing an entire message>

7. Press the Erase All key .
The Confirmation Message will appear.
8. When not erasing the message, press the NO key .
The command will be cancelled. 9. When erasing the message, press the YES key . The message board will be entirely erased. The Message board key will be released from blinking.
Fig. 6-7 Confirmation Message to delete
6-10
10. Press the Exit key Memo menu.
to end the Message
The previous menu will appear.
<Transmitting the Message Board by e-mail.>

The Message Board can be sent by attaching as an image data in e-mail. The Mail destination can be set at "E-mail Setting" under "Destination ID" at control panel. (The setting is made under the Maintenance level.)
1. Press Transmit key Board menu.
on the Message
The Confirmation Message will appear.
Fig. 6-9 Message Board Menu
2. When not sending the message, press the NO key . When sending the message, press the YES key . The message board will be transmitted.
Fig. 6-10 Confirmation Message (to transmit mail)
6-11
6.3.2
Start-up Assistant
The Start-up Assistant menu guides operations until the production is started.
NOTE The Start-up Assistant functions can not be used while non-main menu is displayed. Return to the main menu and start operation.
1. Press the Start-up Assistant key main menu screen.
on the
The Start-up Assistant menu will appear.
Fig. 6-11 Main Menu
2. Appropriate messages are displayed, and the keys to be operated blink until the production is started. Follow the instructions displayed on the screen.
Refer to "4.4.4 Startup Assistant Function" for the start-up assistance procedure.
6-12
6.3.3
Selecting a Language
Select a language on the operation panel. 1. Press the language select key screen. The language select menu will appear. on a
Fig. 6-13 Main Menu
2. Press the language to be selected. The selected language key will light up. The operation language will be switched.
Fig. 6-14 Language Select Menu
6-13
6.3.4
Selecting an Operation Level

on a menu to display the menu to select an operation level.
Press the operation level key
The operation levels are Operator, Site Engineer, Installation, and Maintenance. The operable items differ depending on the operation level. This section explains operation levels except "Maintenance Level"in the "Table 6-3 Operation Level List." Table 6-3 Operation Level List
Name
Operation Level Site Engineer Level
Operation Objected Person

Operator System managers
Operation details
Basic operation for daily product line work
Password
Unnecessary Lower
In addition to the operator level operation, Necessary registration for weighing and adjustment operation operation, operations such as adjustment necessary to the equipment installation Necessary Upper
Installation Level
Mainly our engineering service person
The default of operation panel after turning the power on is the operation level. Changing the operation level to the upper level needs the upper levels passwords. Passwords have been set as shown in below table at shipment. For changing the password, refer to "Password Setting" (6.3.5.2) in Control Panel. Entering password is not necessary for changing the upper operation level to the lower operation level. Table 6-4 Password at shipment
Operation Level
Site Engineer Level Installation Level
Password
1 2
CAUTION
Passwords of the higher operation levels than Site Engineer level is for each objected operator for operation. Keep the passwords secret from non-objected persons.
For changing procedures of operation levels, refer to next pages.
6-14
6.3.4.1
Switching to the Operator Level

on a
1. Press the operation level key menu.
The menu to select the operation level will appear.
Fig. 6-15 Main Menu
2. Select the Operator level. The operation level is switched to the the Operator level.
Fig. 6-16 Operation Level Selection Menu
NOTE Even while displaying the menu for upper levels, the operation level can be switched to the Operator level. When switching the operation level to the Operator level while displaying other than the Main menu, the Main menu for the Operator level will be displayed.
6.3.4.2
Switching to the Site Engineer Level
When switching the operation level to the Site Engineer level, the password for the Site Engineer level is required.
6-15
1. Press the operation level key menu.
on a
Fig. 6-17 Main Menu
2. Select the Site Engineer level. The keyboard to enter the password will appear. 3. Enter the password for the Site Engineer level. The main menu for the Site Engineer level will appear.
6.3.4.3
Switching to the Installation Level
When switching the operation level to the Installation level, the password for the Installation level is required. Follow the procedure to switch to the Installation level. 1. Press the operation level select key a screen. on
Fig. 6-19 Main Menu
6-16
2. Select the Installation level. The keyboard to enter the password will appear. 3. Enter the password for the Installation level. The main menu for the Installation level will appear.
6-17
6.3.5
Control Panel
Make settings such as the screen control, password, and data output location on the control panel.
NOTE All functions on the control panel can be operated at the Installation level or above.
1. Press the control panel key
on a menu.
The Control Panel menu will appear.
Fig. 6-21 Main Menu
Fig. 6-22 Control Panel Menu
Table 6-5 Names and Functions of the Control Panel menu

No.
1
Name
Screen Control
Function
Changes the screen control on the operation panel.
Reference
6.3.5.1
6-18
Table 6-5 Names and Functions of the Control Panel menu (Continued)
No.
2 3 4 Exit key
Name
Password Setting, Language Selection Setting Destination ID
Function
Changes the password of the operation level. Selects an operation language to be displayed on the Language Selection Menu. Sets the data destination, access address, and e-mail. Terminate the Control Panel menu, and returns to the previous menu.
Reference
6.3.5.2 6.3.5.3
6.3.5.1
Screen Control
The Screen Control menu sets and changes the Screen Control on the Operation Panel. 1. Select the Screen Control tab on the Control Panel menu. The Screen Control menu will appear. 2. Make necessary settings by following the table shown next. 3. Select other setting menu or press the Exit key to end the setting.
Fig. 6-23 Screen Control Menu
Fig. 6-24 Screen Control Menu
6-19
Table 6-6 Setting Item and Functions of Screen Control Menu

No. Name Function
Selects the backlight saver mode (Saver On, Semi brightness, Full brightness). Saver On: After the time set on the Screen Control Menu passes, brightness of the screen changes to semi brightness. Full brightness: Always displayed with full brightness. Semi brightness: Always displayed with semi brightness. When setting at "Save on," sets the time from the last operation of the menu to the semi brightness status of the back light. Setting is available within 0 to 255 minutes by the minute. Selects the screen wallpaper. Selects the character for the message window. The expression on the character face tells the unit status.
Backlight Saver
2 3 4
BL Saver On Time Wallpaper Characters
NOTE When the room temperature is 5 C or lower, the life time of the backlight may be shorten. It is recommended to use backlight "On" under a cool-temperature environment.
6.3.5.2
Password Set
The password for the each operation level can be set and changed on the Password Set menu.
NOTE "Language Selection Setting" on the menu cannot be operated under the Installation level.
1. Select the Passrowd Set tab on the Control Panel menu. "Password Setting" and "Language Selection Setting" menu appears.
Fig. 6-25 Control Panel Menu
6-20
2. Selects the operation level. The keyboard will appear. 3. Enter the password and press the return key . 4. Select other setting menu or press the Exit key to end the setting.
Fig. 6-26 Password Setting, Language Selection Setting menu
6.3.5.3
Destination ID
The destinations for preset detail and summary detail can be set and changed on the Destination ID menu. Website address and e-mail address to be displayed on the Information menu can be set.
Fig. 6-27 Destination ID Menu
Table 6-7 Names and Functions of the Keys on the Destination ID

No.
1
Name
Destination ID
Function
Selects the Destination ID whether or not to output to Printer, File, or E-mail. When the Print key is pressed on the other menu, data is output by the selected output method. Enters the website address displayed when pressing the Information display key via the keyboard.
Access Address
6-21
<Setting the Destination ID>

1. Select the Destination ID tab on the Control Panel menu. The Destination ID menu will appear.
Fig. 6-28 CONTROL PANEL Menu
2. Press the drop down key to select the Destination ID (printer, file, e-mail). Select "NO" when not outputting to any location. 3. Press the Exit key to end the setting.
Fig. 6-29 Destination ID Menu
<Setting the access address>

1. Press the Access Address key on the Destination ID menu. The keyboard will appear. 2. Enter the internet address.
Fig. 6-30 Destination ID
6-22
Handling the memory card

This weigher is equipped with the memory card slot for saving the preset data and outputting the history. When saving the output data to the memory card, or reading the reservation data from the memory card, writing to the memory card, and copying between the card and memory, insert the memory card into the card slot. When setting the data output location as "file," the selected and output data is stored in the memory card.
Fig. 6-31 Card Slot
CAUTION
Read the card with this unit, and do not pull out the card during writing (during accessing). Otherwise, the memory data, or card data may be lost or damaged.
NOTE Make sure to use the memory card that we specified. The other products cannot be used.
6-23
6.3.6
Setting the Date & Time
The date and time for the operation panel can be set and changed on the Time Setting menu.
NOTE Date & Time can be set at Installation level or over.
1. Press the Time Setting key
on a screen.
The Time Setting menu will appear.
Fig. 6-32 Main Menu
2. Enter the year and date with Up and Down keys .
TIP
It is possible to select the date on the calendar.
Fig. 6-33 Time Setting Menu
6-24
3. Enter the time with the Up and Down keys or the ten-key pad.
NOTE Time cannot be entered directly from the clock face.
4. Press the drop-down list key to select year, month, and date. 5. Press the Setting key .
The clock will start with the set date and time.
NOTE Second is 0 at the setting.
6. Press the Exit key Setting menu.
to end the Time
6-25
6.3.7
Help function
This function gives you brief explanation about keys on the screen. 1. Press the Help key Help key blinks. on a menu.
Fig. 6-36 Main Menu
2. Press the key which you want to know. (In this case, "Full Open Lock" is pressed.)
Fig. 6-37 Main Menu (Help key blinks)
The functional description of the pressed key appears. 3. The Help display disappears when you touch any place of the screen. Blinking of the help key is released and the screen back to the normal menu.
Fig. 6-38 Help display menu
6-26
6.4
Main Menu
When the main power switch is turned on, the main menu will appear.
NOTE If you change the operation level to the Installation level after turning on the main power switch, the main menu shown in will appear. Usually, the menu will appear at the Operator level after turning on the main power.
Fig. 6-39 Main Menu
Table 6-8 Names and Functions of the Keys on the Main Menu
No.
1
Name
Zero Adjst key
Display
(
Function
Displays the Zero Adjustment menu. 6.5 Zero Adjustment Menu)
Drain key
Displays the Drain menu. ( 6.7 Drain Menu)
Full Open key
Displays the Full Open menu. ( 6.8 Full Open Lock Menu)
Select Preset key
Displays the Preset menu. ( 6.9 Select Preset Menu) When a photo is resisted for the preset, the photo is displayed on the key. (This key is displayed as an example.)
Preset key
Displays the Preset menu. ( 6.10 Preset Menu)
6-27
Table 6-8 Names and Functions of the Keys on the Main Menu (Continued)
No.
6
Name
Preset item button
Display
Function
Sets and changes the preset details easily. ( 6.10.5 Changing the Preset) Selects the total method. ( 6.11 Total Menu)
Select Total pop-up key
8 9
Machine Set pop-up key Stop key*
Selects the Machine Set and Check menus. Stops the weigher production.
10
Start key*
Starts the weigher production.
11
Power key*
Turns on and off the control power.
*Stop, Start, and Power keys are displayed on a menu. However, the keys cannot be operated when the keys are dimmed.
6-28
6.5
Zero Adjustment Menu
Zero adjustment is the function to memorize the weight when there is no product in the weigh hopper or dispersion table as 0g to each weigh unit or dispersion unit. Perform zero adjustment after starting the weigher and before starting the production. Press the Zero Adjst key on the main menu to display the Zero Adjustment menu.
Table 6-9 Displays and Functions of the Keys on the ZERO ADJUSTMENT Menu
No.
1 2 3
Name
Hopper key Dispersion table key Slct All DF
Display
Function
Press a hopper to be adjusted. Press it to select the dispersion table. Selects the dispersion table or cancels the selection.
Slct All WH key
Selects a weigh hopper or cancels the selection.
Start key
Starts zero adjustment.
Exit key
Returns to the Main Menu.
Refer to "4.4.6 Zero Adjustment" for the operating method of Zero Adjustment.
6-29
6.6
Production Menu
on a menu to display the Production menu.
Press the Start key

WARNING
When pressing the Start key, the feeder and hopper start moving. Confirm the safety of the surroundings before pressing the key.
NOTE When the control power is Off, the Start key cannot be pressed. Press the Power key to turn on the control power.
The Start key cannot be pressed when presetting. After completing the setting, press the Exit key to enter the preset content.
CAUTION
Do not close hoppers forcibly when the hoppers are open. It may damage the drive unit. When the main power is turned off when the hoppers are open or the hoppers remain open due to blackout, refer to "11.5 Handling Drive unit"for the corrective actions.
6-30
Table 6-10 Names and Functions of the Keys on the Production Menu
No.
1 2 3 4 5 6
Name
Combination tab FEEDER tab Timing Adjust tab Total Data tab Weight Display tab Feeder optimal value registration key Displays the Combination menu. Displays the Feeder Adjust menu.
Display
Displays the Timing Adjust menu. Displays the Total Data menu. Displays the Weight Display menu. Registers the feeder value as an optimal value. The registered feeder value can be opened with preset "Feeder Optimal value Call up." Sets whether to stop or automatically control the product infeed to the weigher. The lamp turns ON and OFF each time pressing the key. Automatically controls the product infeed to the weigher when the lamp is turned ON. Stops the product infeed to the weigher when the lamp is turned OFF. Returns to the Main Menu.
7 Infeed Control key
8 Exit key
6-31
6.6.1
Combination Menu
Press the Combination tab on the Production menu to display the Combination menu.
Fig. 6-42 Combination Menu
Table 6-11 Names and Functions of the Keys on the Combination Menu
No.
1
Name
Combination weight display
Function
The combination weight value is displayed on each channel. A lamp will appear depending on the combination result. Green lamp: Proper weight Yellow lamp: Overweight Red lamp: Underweight Displays the combination and the weigh statuses. : Head which was weighed and stabled. : Head which participated in combination calculation. The circle colors indicate the stability: green (most stable), white (more stable), and yellow (stable). : Empty head Blank: Head whose weight is unstable. : Head in auto zero adjustment. : Error head (error caused overload or jam) : Head which is set not to participate.
Weigh hopper / Dispersion table display
3 4
Head display guide Select Preset
Displays the head symbols in the flow display. Displays the selected preset item. When pressing the square on the left side of items, the displayed set value can be changed temporally. (Preset item button, 6.10.5 Changing the Preset) Selects display method either from standard or zoom display Standard display icon and zoom display icon are displayed. The selected method is displayed by pressing either icon.
Select Display pop-up key
6-32
6.6.1.1
Display Selection Menu on Production Menu
On the Production Menu, either combination calculation or Weight display can be selected.
Fig. 6-43 Display Selection Menu on Production Menu
Table 6-12 Names and Functions of the keys on the Total Data Menu
No.
1
Name
Combination calculation display key
Display
Function
Selects the combination calculation menu.
Fig. 6-44 Combination calculation menu

2 Weight display key Selects the weight display menu.
Fig. 6-45 Weight display menu
6-33
6.6.2
Feeder Adjust Menu
Press the Feeder Adjust tab on the Production menu to display the Feeder Adjust menu. Refer to "6.12 Feeder Adjustment Menu" for the feeder adjustment. The feeder value changed during production is reflected to the preset data.
6.6.3
Timing Adjut Menu
Press the Timing Adjust tab on the Production menu to display the Timing Adjust menu. Refer to "6.13 Timing Adjustment Menu" for the timing adjustment. The timing value changed during production is reflected to the preset data.
6-34
6.6.4
Total Data Tab
Press the Total Data tab to display the Total Data menu on the Production menu.
Fig. 6-46 Total Data Tab
Table 6-13 Names and Functions of the Keys on the Total Data Menu
No.
1 2 3 4
Name
Total Log drop-down key PRINT key Select Total pop-up key Total Data
Display
Function
The total record is displayed where it resides. Selects the total log to be displayed. Prints the Total Data, or outputs the Total Data in file. Sets the other Total menus. The Total Data is displayed in this area. Displays different Total Data depending the select items.
NOTE The Total Data is the same as the Total Menu on the Main Menu. Refer to "6.11 Total Menu" for details on Total.
6-35
6.6.5
Weight Display Menu
Press the Weight Display tab on the Production menu to display the Weight Display menu.
Fig. 6-47 Weight Display Menu
Table 6-14 Names and Functions of the Keys on the Weight Display Menu
No.
1 2 Hopper Weight Display Weight display for each dispersion table
Function
NOTE The status display for each head is the same as the status display for the head displayed in on the Combination tab.
6-36
6.7
Drain Menu
on the Main menu to display the Drain menu.
Press the Drain key
Fig. 6-48 Drain Menu
Table 6-15 Names and Functions of the Keys on the Drain Menu
No.
1 2
Name
Weight Display tab Feeder Adjust tab
Display
Function
Displays the Weight Display menu. Displays the Feeder Adjust menu. ( 6.12 Feeder Adjustment Menu) Displays the Timing Adjust menu. ( 6.13 Timing Adjustment Menu)
Timing Adjust tab
Auto Zero key
Selects whether or not to perform auto zero adjustment. (Normally, auto zero adjustment is set not to perform.) The lamp turns ON and OFF each time pressing the key. When the lamp is turned ON, automatically performs zero adjustment. When the lamp is turned OFF, does not perform zero adjustment automatically. Sets whether to stop or automatically control product infeed to the weigher. The lamp turns ON and OFF each time pressing the key. When the lamp is turned ON, automatically controls the product infeed to the weigher. When the lamp is turned OFF, stops the product infeed to the weigher. Stops drain temporarily.
Infeed Control key
Drain STOP key
6-37
Table 6-15 Names and Functions of the Keys on the Drain Menu (Continued)
No.
7
Name
Drain START key
Display
Starts drain.
Function
Exit key
Stops drain and displays the main menu.
NOTE Refer to "4.4.9 Draining the Products" for the basic operating method of Drain.
Refer to "6.12 Feeder Adjustment Menu" and "6.13 Timing Adjustment Menu" for information on Feeder Adjustment and Timing Adjustment. The feeder value and timing value that were adjusted on the Drain menu are not reflected to the preset data.
6-38
6.8
Full Open Lock Menu

on the Main menu to display the Full Open Lock menu.
Press the Full Open key
NOTE
Do not use the Power key weigher. during full openlock. Doing so may result in damage to the
Fig. 6-49 Full Open Lock Menu
Table 6-16 Names and Functions of the Keys on the Full Open Lock menu
No.
1 2
Name
Unit Select tab Feeder Adjust tab
Display
Function
Displays the Unit Select menu. Displays the Feeder Adjustment menu. ( 6.12 Feeder Adjustment Menu ) Sets whether to operate the dispersion feeders.
DF key
RF key
Sets whether to operate the radial feeders.
WH key
Sets whether to fully open the weigh hoppers.
PH key
Sets whether to fully open the pool hoppers.
6-39
Table 6-16 Names and Functions of the Keys on the Full Open Lock menu (Continued)
No.
7 Close key
Name
Display
Function
Fully closes the hoppers.
Open key
Fully opens the hoppers.
Exit key
Displays the Full Open Lock menu.
6.8.1
Full Open Lock
<Function>
Full open lock is the function to retain the pool and weigh hoppers as opened. You can use this function to check the operation of each unit.
<Operating procedure>
1. Press the lamp keys of the hoppers to fully open or the feeders to operate. The pressed hopper and feeder keys will light up in green.
2. Press the Open key
The specified hoppers will be retained as opened. Or the operation of the specified feeders will start.
NOTE Follow the setting on the feeder adjustment ( 6.12 Feeder Adjustment Menu) for the limit amplitude.
6-40
3. Press the Close key
The hoppers will close. Or the operation of the feeders will stop.
NOTE The menu cannot end until all hoppers are closed.
6.8.2
Feeder Adjust Menu
Press the Feeder Adjust tab on the Full Open Lock menu to display the Feeder Adjust menu.
NOTE Refer to "6.12 Feeder Adjustment Menu" for the feeder adjustment.
The feeder value that was adjusted on the Full Open Lock menu is not reflected to the preset data.
6-41
6.9
6.9.1
Select Preset Menu

Photo Display
on the Main menu to display the Select
Press the photo part of the preset display (Select preset key) Preset menu.
Table 6-17 Names and Functions of the Keys on the Select Preset Menu
No.
1 2
Name
Select preset display Select Preset key
Display
Function
Displays the selected the preset number, product name, and target weight. Open the preset. The preset no., product name, target weight (quantity), upper weight (quantity), and speed are displayed on the key. The photo is displayed if there are any photo data. Switches the display method to the list display method.
Display Selection key
Preset No. key
Selects the Preset No. directly via ten-key.
Exit key
Returns to the Main menu.
6-42
6.9.2
List Display
on the Select Preset menu to display the list menu.
Press the Display Selection key
Table 6-18 Names and Functions of the Keys on the Select Preset Menu
No.
1 2
Name
Select Preset display Select Preset unit
Display
Function
Displays selected preset numbers, names of products, and target weights. Each row is a key to open preset. Displays specification numbers, preset numbers, names of products, target weights (or quantity), speed, number of discharging, and revised timing. Switches the display method to the photo display method.
Display Selection key
Preset Number. Key
Selects the preset number directly by the ten-key.
Exit key
Returns to the main menu.
Header of row
Rearranges the preset data by using the pressed row as the basis by pressing it.
Each option on the list can be sorted. When the header of each row (e.g. Product Name) is pressed, the items are rearranged in ascending sequence by using the pressed row as the basis.
6-43
6.10 Preset Menu

Press the Preset key on the Main menu to display the Preset menu.
NOTE The preset functions can be operated at the Site Engineer level or the upper levels.
Table 6-19 Displays and Functions of the Keys on the Preset Menu
NO.
1
Name
Preset change key
Function
Selects the Preset Number to set. If preset details have been changed, the confirmation screen "Register the contents on the display to the preset No.?" appears. Selects the Preset No. directly via the ten-key. Performs the settings for the product to preset. Performs the feeder adjustment. Performs the timing adjustment. Performs the settings for weight. Returns to the Main menu.
2 3 4 5 6 7
Preset No. direct select key Finish Prdct Setting Feeder Adjustment Timing Adjustment Weight Setting Exit key
6-44
6.10.1 Product Setting
Fig. 6-57 Product Setting Menu
Table 6-20 Names and Functions of the Tabs on the Product Setting Menu
No.
1 2 3 4
Name
Product tab Machine tab Item tab Others tab
Function
Performs the setting for the product to preset. Performs the setting for the weigher to meet the product. Performs the advanced setting for the weigher environment. Performs the other settings.
6.10.1.1 Product Tab Menu

The Product Tab menu is the first menu that is displayed on the Preset menu. When other Preset menus are displayed, press the Product tab for the Product Set menu.
6-45
Fig. 6-58 Product Tab Menu
Table 6-21 Names and Functions of the Keys on the Product Tab Menu
No.
1
Menu
Product Name key
Function
Sets by entering the product name via the keyboard. The set product name is displayed on the key. Up to 24 one-byte (12 two-byte) characters can be set. Sets by entering the product cord via the keyboard. The set product cord is displayed on the key. Up to 12 one-byte characters can be set. Sets by entering the product category via the keyboard. The set product category is displayed on the key. Up to 4 one-byte characters can be set. Selects the photo or illustration of a product. Takes photos.
Product Code key
Product Category key
4 5
Photo select key
Camera key
TIP
Any alphabets and numerals can be entered for the Product Category. Utilize this function to manage products.
6-46
Taking photos of product

1. Press the Camera key .
A message to confirm the photo taking will appear.
Fig. 6-59 Product Tab Menu
2. Point the product at the camera, and press the Yes key .
The taken photo will be displayed. The image taken by the camera is displayed on the left, and the image previously taken is displayed on the right. 3. Press the Exit key when not taking a when
Fig. 6-60 Message to Confirm the Photo Taking
photo. Press the Photograph key taking a photo.
When Exit key is pressed, the previous menu will appear without taking any photo. When pressing the Photograph key, the taken image will be displayed on the right. 4. Press the Cancel key when retaking when
Fig. 6-61 Taken Photo
another photo. Press the Save key saving the photo. The taken photo will be saved. 5. Press the Exit key .
It will return to the previous menu. The taken image will be registered in the photo list.
6-47
NOTE Images are not shown when the camera is not connected.
Enough light needs to be focused on product when taking photos. The images taken in dark surroundings can be inferior in quality. Only one photo data can be registered for each preset. A new photo is replaced with the old photo when taking a picture with the already registered preset number.
6.10.1.2 Machine Tab Menu

Press the Machine tab on the Product Set menu to display the Machine tab menu.
Fig. 6-64 MACHINE TAB Menu
Table 6-22 Names and Functions of the Keys on the Machine Tab Menu
No.
1 Speed key
Name
Display
Sets the speed via the ten-key. The set numeric value is displayed on the key. This function sets the number of packs to discharge from the weigher per minute. Set the speed according to the product conditions, the target weight, and the capacity of the packer. Sets the dump count via the ten-key. The set numeric value is displayed on the key. This function divides the products to multiple sets and discharges them several times to prevent bulky products from clogging in the packer. The dump count is the number of times to discharge the products. ( Table 6-23 Optimal Dump Count )
Dump Count key
6-48
Table 6-22 Names and Functions of the Keys on the Machine Tab Menu (Continued)
No.
3
Name
Average Control button
Display
Sets whether to perform average control. Average control is the function to control the target weight at a constant interval to ensure the average discharge weight comes close to the target weight. When selecting "Off," it controls not to dump the values less than the target weight. Selects the Interlock Parameter number. ( Table 6-24Packer Interlock Mode (Example) ) Selects the Section Parameter Number from the list. The section parameter number is the function to select the section parameter pattern when separating a weigh head into several sections and weighing different products. There are eight (1 to 8) section parameter patterns. The section parameter pattern is previously set at the Installation level.
Interlock Parameter Number drop-down key Section Parameter Number key
Table 6-23 Optimal Dump Count

Range
400/800 800/1600 1000/2000 2000/4000
Optimal dump count (fractions omitted)

Set target weight 2277.7 Set target weight 5461.2 Set target weight 7192.7 Set target weight 15384.5
Table 6-24 Packer Interlock Mode (Example)

Parameter No.
1 2 3 4 Master Slave Stroke on demand Bag on demand
Specification
Description
2.4 Terminology
6.10.1.3 Item Tab Menu

Press the Item tab on the Product Set menu to display the Item tab menu.
6-49
Fig. 6-65 Item Tab Menu
Table 6-25 Names and Functions of the Keys on the Item Tab Menu
No.
1
Name
Auto Feed Target key
Function
Set the Auto Feed Target via the ten-key. This function sets the number of heads of the weigh hoppers to be selected for discharging the target weight pack. When the feeder control mode is not set to "MANUAL," the amount of product to be infed (feeder values) will be automatically controlled so that the target weight pack is made with the set number of heads. To automatically control the amount of product to be infed, set the auto feeder target, then set the feeder control mode to a mode other than "MANUAL." ( 6.12 Feeder Adjustment Menu) Sets the Disch. Priority Count via the ten-key. This function gives priority to participate in combination calculation to the heads which have not discharged products. If a head has not discharged products after the set cycles (5 to 30) of combination weight, that head will be given priority to participate in combination calculation. Sets the Availability Factor determined as being good using the ten-key. Sets the multiplying factor for the feeder time. Sets the multiplying factor for the feeder time to the numerical value (1 to 8) for the feeder multiply. Example 2) If the feeder multiply is set to "2", one pitch for the feeder time will be 40.0msec at 50Hz and 33.2msec at 60Hz. Selects the open/close action parameter for the pool and weigh hoppers. Selects the open/close action parameter for each hopper such as the pool and weigh hoppers out of 3 kinds of parameters (0, 1, or 2). These parameters are set at the factory. Selects On/Off for the Photo SW. On: Select when using the phototube. Off: Select when not using the phototube.
Disch. Priority Count key
3 4
Good Efficiency Judgement Value Factor key Feed Multiplier key
Hopper Action Parameter Number drop-down key
Photo SW button
6-50
Table 6-25 Names and Functions of the Keys on the Item Tab Menu (Continued)
No.
7
Name
Shutter Drive button
Function
Selects On/Off for the shutter drive. On: Select when using the shutter drive. Off: Select when not using the shutter drive.
6.10.1.4 Others Tab Menus

Press the Others tab on the Product Set menu to display the Others tab menu.
Fig. 6-66 Others Tab Menu
Table 6-26 Names and Functions of the Keys on the Others Tab Menu
No.
1
Name
Stable Time key
Function
Sets the time until weighing is judged as stable or not stable via the ten-key. If the weighing was performed at below the set time, the result is not considered as a stable weigh result.
6-51
6.10.2 Feeder Adjustment

Press the Feeder Adjustment index on the Preset menu to display the Feeder Adjustment.
Fig. 6-67 Feeder Adjustment (Preset Menu)
Table 6-27 Names and Functions of the Keys on the Feeder Adjustment Menu
No.
1 2 4 5 Time key AMP key Initial value key Optimal value key
Name
Display
Function
ON: The feeder time for the radial feeder can be adjusted. ON: Feeder amplitude for the radial feeder can be adjusted. Opens the Feeder adjustment initial value. Opens the Feeder adjustment optimal value. The value is displayed only when the Feeder optimal registration has been performed on the Production Menu (6.6.2Feeder Adjust Menu "Production Menu"). The relative graph of the radial feeder, dispersion feeder, and amplitude. Selects the head of radial feeder or the dispersion feeder. The selected head is displayed in blue. Repeat selecting and releasing each time pressing the key. Increases the feeder values (RF time or RF amplitude) of the selected head Decreases the feeder values (RF time or RF amplitude) of the selected head Pops up the Feed setting Menu.
6 7
Feeder adjustment graph Dispersion table, Head select key Increase key Decrease key Feed setting pop-up key
8 9 10
6-52
Refer to "6.12 Feeder Adjustment Menu" for the details on Feeder Adjustment.
6-53
6.10.3 Timing Adjustment

Press the Timing Adjustment index on the Preset menu to display the Timing Adjustment menu.
Fig. 6-68 Timing Adjustment Menu
Table 6-28 Names and Functions of the Keys on the Timing Adjustment Menu
No.
1 2 3 4 5
Name
Timing Adjustment items key Adjustment direction Timing adjust key (10ms) Timing adjust key (100ms) Enter Time key
Display
Function
Each item is shown in key. Selects the item to be adjusted the timing.
Arrow display
Displays the adjustment direction between units displayed in blue. Adjusts the timing values in units of 10ms. Adjusts the timing values in units of 100ms. Directly enters the value of timing via the ten-key.
Refer to "6.13 Timing Adjustment Menu" for the details on Timing Adjustment.
6-54
6.10.4 Weight Setting

Press the Weight Setting index on the right side of the Preset menu to display the Weight Setting menu.
Fig. 6-69 Weight Setting Menu
Table 6-29 Names and Functions of the Keys on the Weight Setting Menu
No.
1 2 3 4
Name
Extended Upper Limit key Upper Weight Limit Target Weight key Lower Weight Limit key
Function
Accepts a specified number of products as proper weight products even tough they are once over the upper weight limit to improve the availability factor. Sets the upper limit of the proper weight. Sets the target weight via the ten-key. Sets the lower limit of the proper weight. This setting cannot be used when the average control is set to "Off."
Table 6-30 Setting Range of the Target Weight Value

Weighing Capacity of Head
Maximum setting value Minimum setting value
Standard (400g/800g)
99999.0g 0.1/0.2g
Medium (800g/1600g)
99999.0g 0.2/0.5g
6.10.4.1 Target Weight Value

The target weight value sets the weight of products to be drained from the weigher to the packer. The maximum setting value and the minimum setting value are shown in the following table.
6-55
Table 6-31 Setting Range of Target Weight Value

99999.0g 0.1/0.2g
Medium (800g/1600g)
99999.0g 0.2/0.5g
6.10.4.2 Upper Weight Limit Value

The upper weight limit sets the upper limit of the proper weight. The upper weight limit value is set between 0.0g to 999.0g. When 0.0g is set, the upper weight limit value is infinitude. The maximum setting value and the minimum setting value are as follows: Table 6-32 Setting Range of Upper Weight Limit Value
999.0g 0.1/0.2g
Medium (800g/1600g)
999.0g 0.2/0.5g
(Example) If the target weight is set to 100.0g and the upper weight limit is set to 5.0g, the products which weight 100.0g to 105.0g will be drained as the proper weight.
6.10.4.3 Lower Weight Limit Value

Set the lower weight limit value of the proper weight when average control is used. When average control is used, the lower weight limit is automatically set after entering the weigh target value. The upper weight limit value When setting the lower weight limit value, the automatically set lower weight value can be changed. When setting the lower weight value, you can manually change the automatically set lower weight limit value that was automatically set. The changeable range is from 0.0g to the "automatically set lower limit." The maximum setting value and minimum setting value are as follows: Table 6-33 Setting Range of Lower Weight Limit Value
999.0g 0.1/0.2g
Medium (800g/1600g)
999.0g 0.2/0.5g
(Example) If the target weight is set to 100.0g and the upper/lower weight limits are set to 5.0g, the products which weight 95.0g to 105.0g will be drained as the proper weight. Table 6-34 Automatically Set Lower Weight Limit Value
Weigh target value (g)
5.0-50.0 50.0-100.0 100.0-200.0
Automatically set weight value

9% of the target weight value 4.5g 4.5% of the target weight value
6-56
Table 6-34 Automatically Set Lower Weight Limit Value (Continued)

Weigh target value (g)
200.0-300.0 300.0.-500.0 500.0-1000.0 1000.0-10000.0 9g 3% of the target weight value 15g 1.5% of the target weight value
Automatically set weight value
6.10.5 Changing the Preset

The setting for some reservation set items can be changed easily from the Main menu and Production menu. ( 6.4 Main Menu,6.6 Production Menu) Items that can be changed from the Main menu Product name, product code, target weight value, speed, dump count, and upper weight limit Items that can be changed from the Production menu Target weight value, speed, dump count, upper weight value
NOTE This function can be operated at the Site Engineer level or over.
When changing the set value on the Production menu, the preset data is temporally changed during production. The preset data is not reflected. The set data is invalid when selecting the preset or turning off the power after changing the set value on the Production menu.
Fig. 6-70 Main Menu
6-57
No.
1
Name
Preset item button
Display
Function
By pressing the button, the ten-key or keyboard will appear to change the preset details. Press the square buttons or the item name display parts.
6.10.6 Output the Preset

The preset contents can be printed and output in file. When the preset contents are output, the preset management becomes easy. Follow the procedure below to output the preset contents.
NOTE Set the output method from Destination ID (6.3.5.3 Destination ID)on the control panel.
1. Press the Print key on the Preset menu. The preset contents are printed or output in file.
6-58
Fig. 6-72 Preset Output (Example)
6-59
6.11 Total Menu

Open the Select Total menu by pressing the Select Total pop-up key on the left side of the Main menu, and select the total to be displayed from the displayed keys in order to display the Total menu.
Fig. 6-73 Select Total Menu
Table 6-35 Displays and Functions of the Keys on the Select Total Menu
No.
1 2 3 4 5 6
Name
Current Total/Histogram key X-bar chart key Transition display for weigher key Status display for each head key Total Setting key Operation Log key
Display
Function
Displays the total/histogram up to current since after clearing the total. Displays the X-bar chart key. Displays the operation transition of the weigher. Displays the status for each head. Displays the Total Setting menu. Displays the Operation Log.
NOTE The Total Setting keys can be displayed at the Site Engineer level or over.
6-60
6.11.1 Current Total Menu
Fig. 6-74 Current Total Menu
Table 6-36 Names and Functions of the Keys on the Current Total Menu
No.
1 2 3 4 5 Effcncy Total data HISTOGRAM Print key* Exit key*
Name
Display
Function
Displays the efficiency up to current since after starting total. Displays the production status up to current since after starting total. Displays the histogram. Prints or outputs the total data in file. Returns to the previous menu.
6 7
Select total pop-up key* Total Log drop-down key
Selects the other total menus. The total record is displayed where it resides. Selects the total log to be displayed.
*mark: It is also displayed on the other Total menus but has the same functions. Table 6-37 Item List of the Total Data
Item Name
Start Time
Contents
The time when drained the proper weight for the first time after starting the combination calculation. Display: year/month/day hour : minute The time when stopped the combination calculation or the time when output the total. Display: year/month/day hour : minute
Stop Time
6-61
Table 6-37 Item List of the Total Data (Continued)

Item Name
Combination Weigher Speed
Contents
The number of times performed combination calculation for 1 minute every 10 minutes. Unit: wpm The number of times produced during the operating time. Unit: wpm The number of times when drained the proper weight between the start time and the stop time. Displays the proper number for channel when displaying the channel total. Displays the proper number for section when displaying the section total. The total weight drained proper weight between the start time and the stop time. Unit: kg (The unit is lb for the ounce display.) Displays the total weight drained the proper weight for channel when displaying the channel total. Displays the total weight drained the proper weight for section when displaying the section total. The mean weight drained proper weight between the start time and the stop time. Unit: g (The unit is oz for the ounce display.) Displays the mean weight for channel when displaying the channel total. Displays the mean weight for section when displaying the section total. The SD (standard deviation) weight drained proper weight between the start time and the stop time. Unit: g (The unit is oz for the ounce display.) Displays the SD weight for channel when displaying the channel total. Displays the SD weight for section when displaying the section total. The MAX weight drained proper weight between the start time and the stop time. Unit: g (The unit is oz for the ounce display.) Displays the MAX drain weight for channel when displaying the channel total. Displays the MAX drain weight for section when displaying the section total. The MIN weight drained proper weight between the start time and the stop time. Unit: g (The unit is oz for the ounce display.) Displays the MIN drain weight for channel when displaying the channel total. Displays the MIN drain weight for section when displaying the section total. The difference between the MAX drain weight and MIN drain weight drained proper weight between the start time and the stop time. Unit: g (The unit is oz for the ounce display.) Displays the weight range for channel when displaying the channel total. Displays the weight range for section when displaying the section total. The total number drained the proper weight between the start time and the stop time. Unit: pcs Displays the total number drained for proper weight for channel when displaying the channel total. Displays the total number drained for proper weight drain for section when displaying the section total. The average number drained the proper weight between the start time and the stop time. Unit: pcs Displays the average number for channel when displaying the channel total. Displays the average number for section when displaying the section total.
Production Speed Proper
Total Weight
Mean Weight
S.D. Weight
MAX Weight
MIN Weight
Weight Range
Total Number *Displayed only when weighing the number.
Mean Number *Displayed only when weighing the number.
6-62

Item Name
S.D. Number *Displayed only when weighing the number.
Contents
The SD (standard deviation) number drained the proper weight between the start time and the stop time. Unit: pcs Displays the SD number for channel when displaying the channel total. Displays the SD number for section when displaying the section total. The MAX drain number drained the proper weight between the start time and the stop time. Unit: pcs Displays the MAX drain number for channel when displaying the channel total. Displays the MAX drain number for section when displaying the section total. The MIN drain number drained the proper weight between the start time and the stop time. Unit: pcs Displays the MIN drain number for channel when displaying the channel total. Displays the MIN drain number for section when displaying the section total. The difference between the MAX number and MIN number drained proper weight between the start time and the stop time. Unit: pcs Displays the drain number range for channel when displaying the channel total. Displays the drain number range for section when displaying the section total. The total weight of the individual weight drained proper weight between the start time and the stop time. Unit: g (The unit is oz for the ounce display.) Does not display for the mix weighing when displaying the channel total. Displays the mean individual weight when displaying the single weighing or section total. Does not display when section can be switched and displaying the channel total. The SD (standard deviation) individual weight drained proper weight between the start time and the stop time. Unit: g (The unit is oz for the ounce display.) Does not display for the mix weighing when displaying the channel total. Displays the SD individual weight when displaying the single weighing or section total. Does not display when section can be switched and displaying the channel total. The MAX individual weight drained proper weight between the start time and the stop time. Unit: g (The unit is oz for the ounce display.) Does not display for the mix weighing when displaying the channel total. Displays the MAX individual weight drained when displaying the single weighing or section total. Does not display when section can be switched and displaying the channel total. The MIN individual weight drained proper weight between the start time and the stop time. Unit: g (The unit is oz for the ounce display.) Does not display for the mix weighing when displaying the channel total. Displays the MIN individual weight drained for section when displaying the single weighing or section total. Does not display when section can be switched and displaying the channel total.
MAX Drain Number *Displayed only when weighing the number.
MIN Drain Number *Displayed only when weighing the number.
Drain Number Range *Displayed only when weighing the number.
Mean Individual Weight *Displayed only when weighing the number.
S.D. Individual Weight *Displayed only when weighing the number.
MAX Individual Weight *Displayed only when weighing the number.
MIN Individual Weight *Displayed only when weighing the number.
6-63

Item Name
Parent 1 Head Total Weight *Displayed only when the parent/ child weighing is performed.
Contents
The total weight of master head drained proper weight between the start time and the stop time. Unit: kg (The unit is lb for the ounce display.) Does not display for the mix weighing when displaying the channel total. Displays the total weight of parent head drained for section when displaying the single weighing or section total. Does not display when section can be switched. The total weight of master head drained proper weight between the start time and the stop time. Unit: kg (The unit is lb for the ounce display.) Does not display for the mix weighing when displaying the channel total. Displays the total weight of parent head drained for section when displaying the single weighing or section total. Does not display when section can be switched. The total weight of master head drained proper weight between the start time and the stop time. Unit: kg (The unit is lb for the ounce display.) Does not display for the mix weighing when displaying the channel total. Displays the total weight of parent head drained for section when displaying the single weighing or section total. Does not display when section can be switched. The total weight of master head drained proper weight between the start time and the stop time. Unit: kg (The unit is lb for the ounce display.) Does not display for the mix weighing when displaying the channel total. Displays the total weight of parent head drained for section when displaying the single weighing or section total. Does not display when section can be switched. The number of times when underweight occurred between the start time and the stop time. Displays the number of underweight for channel when displaying the channel total. Displays the number of underweight for section when displaying the section total. The number of times when overweight occurred as a result of combination calculation between the start time and the stop time. Displays the number of overweight for channel when displaying the channel total. Displays the number of overweight for section when displaying the section total. The number of times when over scale occurred between the start time and the stop time. Displays the number of over scale for channel when displaying the channel total. Displays the number of over scale for section when displaying the section total. The number of times when errors occurred in the recheck between the start time and the stop time. Displays the number of errors in the channel recheck when displaying the channel total. Displays the number of errors in the section recheck when displaying the section total. The number of times when overweight draining occurred as the result of the combination calculation between the start time and the stop time. Displays the number of over scale drained in the channel combination when displaying the channel total. Displays the number of over scale drained in the section combination when displaying the section total.
Underweight
Combination Overweight (Under/ Over)
Over Scale (Under/ Over)
Recheck Error
Combination Overweight (Overweight Draining)
6-64

Item Name
Over Scale (Overweight Draining)
Contents
The number of times when over scale draining occurred between the start time and the stop time. Displays the number of over scale drained for channel when displaying the channel total. Displays the number of over scale drained for section when displaying the section total. The total weight drained overweight between the start time and the stop time. Unit: kg (The unit is lb for the ounce display.) Displays the total weight of overweight drained for channel when displaying the channel total. Displays the total weight of overweight drained for section when displaying the section total. The number of times when metal is detected between the start time and the stop time. Unit: times If the metal mixture number is 0, this item is not displayed. The accumulated time while production is On between the start time and the stop time. Display: hour : minute The accumulated time while production is Off between the start time and the stop time. Display: hour : minute The accumulated time of infeeder shortage during operating time. Display: hour : minute
Total Weight (Overweight Draining)
Metal Mixture
Product On Time Product Off Time Low Product Time
6-65
6.11.2 X-bar Chart Menu
Fig. 6-75 X-bar Chart Menu
Table 6-38 Names and Functions of the Keys on the X-bar Chart menu.
No.
1 2 3 4 Print key
Name
Upper limit Average weight Lower limit +3 ( =Standard deviation)
Description
Displays the average weight per 250 rotations by adding every result since after starting total. -3 ( =Standard deviation) Prints or outputs in file the total data.
6-66
6.11.3 Transitional Data of Weigher Menu

Displays the operation transition of the weigher by the time transition on the Transitional Data of Weigher menu. Displays the time on the horizontal axis and each numeric number on the vertical axis. At most four graphs can be displayed at the same time.
Fig. 6-76 Transitional Data of Weigher Menu (Example)
Table 6-39 Names and Functions of the Keys on the Transitional Data of Weigher Menu
No.
1
Name
Select Item key
Function
Selects the items to be displayed from the below (At most four items can be selected). Average Head's Selected Average Stable Heads Proper/Over Wt/Over Scale Efficiency Mean Standard Deviation Speed Average Infeed Weight Piece Weight Revision Parent Dump Weight Prints or outputs in file the total data.
2 Print key
6-67
6.11.4 Participation Data per Head Menu

The Status Data per Head menu displays the operation status of the weigher per head. At most four graphs can be displayed at the same time.
Fig. 6-77 Cmb. Participation Data per Head Menu (Example)
Table 6-40 Names and Functions of the Keys on the Participation Data per Head Menu
No.
1
Name
Select Item key
Function
Selects the items to be displayed from the below (At most four items can be selected). Selected Ratio Stable Ratio Empty Ratio Auto Zero Ratio Error Ratio Over Scale Ratio Plus Full Scale Ratio Minus Full Scale Ratio 3rd filter Selected Ratio 4th filter Selected Ratio Unstable Ratio Average Infeed Product Amount SD Infeed Production Amount Prints or outputs in file the total data.
2 Print key
6-68
6.11.5 Total Setting Menu

Open the Total Setting menu by pressing the Select Total pop-up key and press the Total Setting key to display the Total Setting menu.
Fig. 6-78 Total Setting Menu
Table 6-41 Names and Functions of the Keys on the Total Setting Menu
No.
1
Name
Every Combination Print
Function
Sets whether or not to print the combination weights during production. Yes: Outputs the combination weight value during production No: Not output the combination weight value during production. Sets whether to print the operation log contents. Yes: Outputs the contents of the key operation log. No: Not output the contents of the key operation log. Selects the contents to be printed such as the commands executed by the weigher and the errors occured during production. Selects the temporary measure when the statistical data becomes full. Stop: Stops the production. Continue: Deletes the old data, and continues the production.
Operation Log Print
3 4
Operation Log Contents Action for Statistical Mem. Full
5 6 7
BATCH TOTAL INTERVAL Sets the time interval to print the batch total data by the hour. Hour Data Sampling Interval Hour Sets the Data Sampling Interval by the minute. Clears the accumulated statistical data. All Total key
8 Print key
Prints or outputs in file the total data.
6-69
6.11.6 Operation Log Menu

Open the Select Total menu by pressing the Select Total pop-up key and press the Operation Log key to display the Operation Log menu.
Fig. 6-79 Operation Log Menu
Table 6-42 Functions on the Operation Log Menu

No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 Print key
Name
Error Stop Log Warning Log Machine Operation Log Key Operation Log Operation log display area
Function
Displays the error log that weigher stopped. Displays the Warning Log that weigher released. Displays the operations that weigher performed. Displays the key operation log of weigher. Displays the items that are selected in the log items Prints or outputs in file the total data.
6-70
6.12 Feeder Adjustment Menu

Feeder adjustment is the function to adjust the amount of product to be supplied to the pool hoppers, radial troughs, and dispersion table by setting the amplitude and the operation time of the radial and dispersion feeders. Feeder adjustment value varies depending on the shape of product and the target weight value. Feeder adjustment is needed if the products supplied from the pool hoppers to the dispersion table are too many or too few. Press the Feeder Adjust tab or Feeder Adjust index on the following menu to display the Feeder Adjustment menu. Production Menu Drain Menu Full Open Lock Menu Preset Menu
NOTE The Feeder Adjustment menu for Production is shown below as an example. The feeder adjustment menu varies depending on the operation menus, but the setting method is the same.
Fig. 6-80 FEEDER ADJUST Menu
Table 6-43 Names and Functions of the Keys on the FEEDER ADJUST Menu
No.
1
Name
Head Select key (Illustration key)
Display
Function
Selects the head No. to be performed the feeder adjustment. Operates simultaneously with the next head select key (Figure key).
6-71
Table 6-43 Names and Functions of the Keys on the FEEDER ADJUST Menu (Continued)
No.
2 3
Name
Live/C.G. switch tab Head Select key (Figure key)
Display
Function
Switches whether to display the illustration of a head or to display the image taken by a camera. Selects the head No. to be performed feeder adjustment. Operates simultaneously with the next head select key (Illustration key) Displays the radar chart for feeder adjustment. ON: The feeder time for the radial feeder can be adjusted. Turn ON and press the Increase and Decrease keys to change the feeder time. ON: The feeder amplitude for the radial feeder can be adjusted. Turn ON and press the Increase and Decrease keys to change the feeder amplitude. ON: Displays the graph of the mean infeed amount for each WH. Displayed in pink on the graph when the mean infeed amount key for each WH is selected. Displayed in gray when it is not selected. Connect points with straight lines to display the values. ON: Displays the graph of the mean infeed amount for each section. Adjust the center and perimeter of the circle within the range of 0%-200%. Set the proper weight to 100%. Displayed in red on the graph when mean infeed amount key for each section is selected. Displayed in gray when it is not selected. The value is displayed in circular arc. Increases the feeder values (RF time or RF amplitude) of the selected head. Decreases the feeder values (RF time or RF amplitude) of the selected head. Changes the display of the feeder adjustment menu. Pop up AFD setting menu. The moderate weight range of the feeder value is displayed in pale green while displaying the bar graph and the circle graph. Adjust the Head Mean and Section Mean within the range. Switches whether or not to display the radar chart on the illustration key on the left side.
RF Time lamp key
RF AMP lamp key
HEAD Me... lamp key
SECTION Me... lamp key
8 9 10
Increase key Decrease key Feed setting pop-up key
11
Optimal Weight Range of Feeder value Lader chart switch arrow key
12
6-72
NOTE The combination weight value is also displayed on the Feeder Adjustment menu during production.
The feeder adjustment on the Production menu will influence the preset setting. The feeder values changed on the Drain or Full Open Lock menu will not influence the reservation settings. Refer to "6.10.2 Feeder Adjustment" for the Feeder Adjustment menu during the preset setting.
Feeder Adjustment
1. Press the head number to be adjusted on the Feeder Adjustment menu. (OK to select more than one.) The pressed head turns blue.
Fig. 6-81 Feeder Adjustment Menu
2. Press RF TIME lamp key when adjusting the feeder driving time. Press RF AMP lamp key when adjusting the feeder drive unit time. (It is OK to select both.) The selected lamp key will light up.
6-73
3. Press the Increase key or Decrease key to adjust the time or amplitude. The feeder time or amplitude will be switched. The radar chart will change to meet the adjustment value.
TIP
If only three or fewer heads are selected, the setting of the feeder time will influence the weighing accuracy. In this case, set the feeder amplitude and operation time to values about five points lower than usual, and wait for 1 or 2 minutes to confirm the operating condition.
NOTE The feeder control key is set to "AUTO," the set feeder amplitude and time will be applied temporarily, and they will be automatically controlled as time elapses.
6.12.1 Feeder Adjustment Menu Display Switch

Pressing the Feed setting pop-up key on the Feeder Adjustment menu displays the Feed setting pop-up Menu. The Feed setting pop-up Menu can switch the screen to any of Production Status Information, Feeder Circle Graph, Feeder Bar Graph, and AFD Setting. 1. Press the Feed setting pop-up key 2. Feed setting pop-up Menu appears. .
6-74
3. Select a desired option from the following table.
Fig. 6-85 Feed setting Pop-up Menu
No.
1
Names and Functions

Production Status Information Displays AFD status and Production status.
Display example
Fig. 6-86 Production Status Information

2 Circle graph display Displays the feeder value on a circle graph.
Fig. 6-87 Circle graph

3 Bar graph display Displays the feeder value on a circle graph.
Fig. 6-88 Bar graph
6-75
No.
4
Names and Functions

AFD Setting Displays the AFD Setting menu (6.12.2 AFD Selection Operation). ( 6.12.2Auto Adjustment Method)
Display example
Fig. 6-89 AFD Setting
6.12.2 Auto Adjustment Method

< Function >
This function selects the control method of Feeder Amplitude, Time, and Dispersed Weight. The control method has the following eight types of mode. Refer to the following explanation for controlling to select the mode according to the product character, product feeding condition, and speed. Table 6-44 Objected Parameters of Feeder Auto Control
Control Parameter
Manual Auto Every Head matic Optional
RF Time
RF AMP
DF Time
DF AMP
Dispersed Weight
Manual
Mode name
Good Efficiency Judgement Value Factor Refer Control Auto Individual Control Auto Time Individual Control Auto AMP Individual Control
All Head
Auto All Control Auto Time All Control Auto AMP All Control
TIP
Blank in the above table means manual.
< For Advanced Utilization >

Note as follows for advanced utilization of the Auto Control and stable operation.
6-76
Table 6-45 List of points for Auto Control

Keyword
Pre-Feed Condition
Point
The stable pre-feed condition is required. Especially in extreme change of the amount supplied, select Manual to avoid deterioration of the availability due to setting of Auto Control in some cases. It is important that the weighed products are conveyed completely and equally as much as possible from the dispersion feeder to each radial feeder. Adjust the place of the feed equipment, feed speed, the place of the feed chute, and so on so that the weighed products fall from the feed equipment to the center of the dispersion feeder and are dispersed equally as much as possible. On setting the feeder parameter, starting operation, or operation being unstable, confirm the flow of the weighed products on the dispersion feeder by visual check or the dispersion camera (optional). In the event of problems, take corrective measures such as arrangement of the feed equipment place. The status that all heads are movable is required. When impossible, the problem has to be solved. Auto Control may not operate efficiently when there are not enough stable heads for combination due to influence such as floor vibration. In this case, it is important to confirm stable heads by checking speed, selecting the filter and so on. Auto Control adjusts Feed Capability of the feeder according to change of the flow of the weighed products by the sediments on the table and the trough. However, Auto Control cannot handle the case that the excessive sediments stop the weighed products. For this reason it is important to make proper cleaning depending on the situation to keep a high availability factor. Auto Control assumes that the feed amount of the weighed products are increased or decreased according to increasing and decreasing of the feeder amplitude. Auto Control may not operate well when this condition is not satisfied due to the object to be weighed or the target weight. In this case, select Manual or Auto Control by Time Only.
Dispersion of weighed products
Number of moving heads Number of stable head
Proper cleaning
Feed Capability of Feeder
< Explanation of Controls >

1. Manual Feeder AMP, Feeder Production Time, and Dispersed Weight operate at the set value. Automatic correspondence to the change of the external conditions such as the flow condition of the weighed products by sediments on the table and the trough or amount supplied is not available However, this is suitable for: the case that feeding and the flow condition of the weighed products are stable and the case that arrangement is made with checking the change of the external situation. Select this also when the stable operation cannot be performed even after setting Auto Control as it is unlikely that the operation condition worse extremely because of the change of the external situation. 2. Good Efficiency Judgement Value Factor Refer Control This control aims Auto Control according to product characters, slight bias of feeding, table of the amount supplied, and the change of the flow condition of the weighed products on the trough. This control has the following features (When examining auto control, try this control first): Performs proper control in consideration of the weigh machine condition. Can arrange flow volume automatically from the dispersion feeder to the radial feeder when selecting the dispersed weight operation. The control stops in the stable condition that the Efficiency ( 6.11.1Current Total Menu) set at the good Efficiency determination value is achieved. The control restarts automatically in deterioration of the Efficiency due to the change of the external situation.
6-77
Controls Feed Capability of the dispersion feeder to make flow volume smaller when selecting the overweight feeding action and the weight on the dispersion feeder becomes bigger than the dispersed weight setting value.
The followings are to be noted for the setting of the control. Set RF Time and Time less than below valid time according to the product and speed. If DF consecutive operation is required, set more than below valid time. [Valid DF (RF) Time] = 3600 / [Weigher speed] Perform visual check or a check by the dispersion camera (optional) of the dispersion situation of the products on the dispersion table exactly and set the value to feed the weighed products to the all radial trough as DF AMP. For the auto Adjustment range ( next table. 6.12.3Auto Adjustment range Setting) setting, refer to the
Table 6-46 Auto Adjustment range

Item Name
RF AMP Upper Limit
Example of recommendable setting

Set larger numbers based on the Mean value of the set all RF AMP. Generally, as the RF AMP increases the corresponding WH weight also increases, but the WH weight stops increasing at a certain level due to limitation of the weighed product flow. For this reason, set the value correctly within the limit. There is a case that the feed of the weighed products stops even if the AMP is over 0. Set the appropriate lower limit of AMP so that the feed does not stop.
RF AMP Lower Limit
RF Time Upper Limit, Lower Upper limit 99, Lower limit 0 Limit DF AMP Upper Limit, Lower Upper limit 99, Lower limit 0 Limit DF Time Upper Limit DF Time Lower Limit (Valid only when selecting Overweight Feeding action.) Use the same number of the set DF Time as an indication. Enter a slightly smaller value than set DF Time. This is effective for the products with good dispersion to keep flow volume from DF to RF, as the overweight feeding action function performs at wide range in case the lower Limit is considerably smaller than the set DF Time. For the products with poor dispersion, set the lower value as near the set DF Time as possible. It is ideal that the lower limit is the smallest weight which can disperse the weighed products from the dispersion feeder to RF stably, and the upper limit is the biggest weight which does not cause unstable elements such as Overscale even if the lay thickness is thick. However it is rare that such conditions can be easily found. So we recommend to set the smaller range than the set target weight and to widen it gradually according to the problem.
Dispersion Weight Upper Limit (Valid only when selecting Dispersion Weight operation)
AFD Control Stop Dispersion Limit setting of the DF actual weight that Auto Control stops the operation. Auto Weight Lower Limit (%) Control stops when the DF actual weight is less than the set value. In general 50% or so are good, however in case of frequent supply shortage, set the value smaller to stop the auto control earlier.
Turn off the dispersion weight operation function if the layer thickness on the dispersion feeder does not change after increasing the dispersion weight set value, such as the case the layer thickness keep thickness constant with the infeed chute. In this case, adjust DF AMP, Time, Infeed chute height and so on and adjust so that the products flow from the dispersion feeder to the radial feeder in just proportion.
6-78
This is not suitable for the case you want to fix the feeder AMP, like the weighed products do not move unless the feeder AMP is increased. In this case, select Manual or Auto Control of the other time only.
3. Auto Individual Control, Auto Time Individual Control, Auto AMP Individual Control These control each RF individually, as in "2 Efficiency refer control." These can be selected when automatic detailed control is desired with the condition that supply and dispersion to each radial feeder are stable. Select Auto Time Individual Control especially when you want to fix the feeder AMP, such as for the case that the weighed products can move only with the large feeder AMP. Also select Auto AMP Individual Control when you want to fix the feeder time in high-speed operation. As instructions for use, adjust layer thickness on the dispersion feeder with the dispersion weight or the infeed chute height arrangement when you want to arrange flow volume only from the dispersion feeder to the radial feeder, as AMP and Time of RF and DF are not controlled individually. Also when supply and dispersion to each radial feeder is unstable, or when the dispersion is not uniform, select other control as these controls may even deteriorate the average function by contrast.
6-79
4. Auto Whole Control, Auto Time Whole Control, Auto AMP Whole Control These can control the whole RF, not like other auto controls. When selecting 2 Efficiency refer control or 3 Auto individual control, feed bias may become extremely big or blank heads at the particular heads occur frequently due to poor dispersion. However these controls correspond to the condition changes only which affect the whole machine after a long time, like effect by sediments. As with 3 Auto Individual Control, select Auto AMP Whole Control when you want to fix the feeder time in high-speed operation and Auto Time Whole Control when you want to fix the feeder AMP in case that the weighed products do not move unless the feeder AMP is increased. As an instruction for use, set RF AMP and the balance between the heads of RF Time bigness manually in consideration of feed bias. As with 3 Auto Individual Control, adjust layer thickness on the dispersion feeder with the dispersion weight or the infeed chute height arrangement when you want to arrange flow volume only from the dispersion feeder to the radial feeder, as AMP and Time of RF and DF are not controlled individually.
< Operating procedure >

1. Press the Feed setting Pop-up key 2. The Feed setting Pop-up key appears. .
3. Select the AFD Setting. The AFD Setting Menu appears.
6-80
4. Select the AFD production method and press the button. The selected AFD production method is confirmed.
Fig. 6-92 AFD Setting Menu
6.12.3 Auto Adjustment range Setting

< Function >
This function sets the limitation for the operation when selecting Auto Control. The control may not perform well as it is highly sensitive to the big change of the external condition. The function avoids this kind of trouble with limitation of the operation of the control. Meanwhile, be minded that the auto control may not perform efficiently if the range is too narrow. This control value is applied to the parameter which is objected control of each feeder auto control in 6.12.2. 1. RF
Item Name
AMP Upper Limit, Lower Limit Time Upper Limit, Lower Limit
Function
RF AMP is operated within the range between the set upper and lower limit in auto control. RF Time is operated within the range between the set upper and lower limit in auto control.
2. DF
Item Name
AMP Time Weight (g)
Function
DF AMP is operated within the range between the set upper and lower limit in auto control. DF Time is operated within the range between the set upper and lower limit in auto control. Dispersed Weight is operated within the range between the set upper and lower limit in auto control.
AFD Control Stop Dispersion Limit setting of the DF actual weight that Auto Control stops the operation. Auto Weight Lower Limit (%) Control stops when the DF actual weight is less than the set value. (Example) When the DF target weight is 300 g and the AFD control stop dispersion weight lower limit is 60%, the auto control stops operation at the level the DF actual weight is less than 120 g.
6-81
NOTE When there are setting procedure in 6.12.2, follow them for setting.
Set the Lower limit so that the weighed products do not stop. Be noted that feeding of the weighed products may stops at the AMP 0 when decreasing RF and DF AMP. Setting DF Time more than below valid time makes consecutive operation. [Valid DF (RF) Time] = 3600 / [Weigher speed]
< Operation procedure >

1) RF Auto Adjustment range 1. Select any of RF as a head to be adjusted on the Feeder adjustment menu. 2. Press the Feed setting Pop-up key. Feed setting Pop-up appears. 3. Press the number of the item to be set from the Auto Adjustment range Setting Table. The ten-key pad appears. 4. Enter the value of the Adjustment range. The ten-key pad disappears and entered number appears in the table. 2) DF Auto Adjustment range 1. Select any of DF as a head to be adjusted on the Feeder adjustment menu. 2. Press the Feed setting Pop-up key. Feed setting Pop-up appears. 3. Press the number of the item to set from the Auto Adjustment range Setting Table. The ten-key pad appears. 4. Enter the value of the Adjustment range. The ten-key pad disappears and entered number appears in the table.
Fig. 6-94 Feeder Adjustment Menu Fig. 6-93 Feeder Adjustment Menu
6-82
6.13 Timing Adjustment Menu

Timing adjustment is the function to adjust the operation timing of each driving part so that the products are smoothly supplied, weighed, and discharged. Press the Timing Adjust tab or the Timing Adjust menu to display the Timing Adjust menu. Production Menu Drain Menu Preset Menu
NOTE The Timing Adjustment menu for Drain is shown below as an example. The Timing Adjust menu varies depending on the operation menus, but the setting method is the same.
Fig. 6-95 Timing Adjustment Menu
Table 6-47 Names and Functions of the Keys on the Timing Adjustment Menu
No.
1 2 3 4 5
Name
Timing Adjustment item Adjustment direction Increase/Decrease key (10ms) Increase/Decrease key (100ms) Enter Time key
Display
Function
Each item is shown in key. Select the item to be adjusted the timing.
Arrow display
Displays the adjustment direction within units displayed in blue. Increases and Decreases the numerical values in units of 10ms. Increases and decreases the numerical values in units of 100ms. Directly enters the value of timing via the ten-key.
6-83
1. Press the Timing Adjustment items key to select the part to be adjusted. 2. Press and to adjust the value of timing. .
The value of timing can be also adjusted by pressing the Enter Time key Selects the Auto Adjustment items by pressing the Auto Adjust pop-up key. 3. Repeats the procedures 2 and 3 to adjust the other adjustment items.
When starting the Production, Drain, and Full Open Lock, press each operating key at this point. 4. Press the Exit key to return to the Main menu. Table 6-48 List of Timing Adjustment
No.
1 2 3 4 5
Timing adjustment item

WH-DS IS-WH WH-PH PH-RF STAGGER
Description
Sets the time from the discharge request signal input from the packer to the discharge completion signal output. Sets the time from the discharge request signal input from the packer to the start of the WH (weigh hopper). Sets the time from the start of the WH (weigh hopper) to the start of the PH (pool hopper). Sets the time from the start of the PH (pool hopper) to the start of the RF (radial feeder). This item can be set when the timing hopper is not used. This function prevents the product from clogging in the packer. Set the time interval for discharging the products divided to three sets from the selected heads. This function can be deactivated by setting it to 0 msec.
NOTE Set these parameters carefully because they are crucial for production.
6-84
6.14 Machine Set Menu

The Machine Set menu is to set the whole of the machine. The Machine Set menu appears by pressing the "Machine Set" pop-up key on the Main Menu screen. Select an option you want to set in order to call up each set menu. Options to be set on the Machine Set Menu are as follows: Manual Adjustment ( Self-diagnosis ( 6.14.1Manual Adjustment)
6.14.2Self-diagnosis Menu) 6.14.3Layout Setting / Data Manager)
Layout Setting / Data Manager( Parameter setting ( Weigher setting(
6.14.4Parameters Setting) 6.14.5Weigher setting) 6.14.6Peripheral devise setting)
Peripheral Equipment setting(
NOTE The "Machine Set" pop-up key appears on the Site Engineer or higher levels.
1. Press the Machine Set pop-up key on the Main Menu screen. The Machine Set pop-up menu appears.
Fig. 6-96 Main Menu
2. Press the option you want to set. The set menu of the selected option appears.
Fig. 6-97 Machine Set Menu
6-85
Press the Exit key after setting each option to return to the Main Menu screen.
6.14.1 Manual Adjustment

The Manual Setting Menu appears by selecting "Manual Adjustment" on the Machine Set pop-up menu. On the Manual Setting Menu, Weigh Adjustment, each adjustment of Combination Calculation, and display. Select each menu on the tab.
6.14.1.1
Weigh Adjustment
WH manual zero adjustment and span adjustment are available in the Weigh Adjustment Menu.
Fig. 6-98 Weigh Adjustment Menu
Table 6-49 Setting Items and Functions on the weight details Setting Menu
No.
1 WH key
Name
Display
Function
Selects WH to perform zero adjustment
ALL HD. SLCT/CLR key
Selects all WH
Zero adjustment key
Performs zero adjustment for the selected WH.
WH span adjustment key
Performs span adjustment for the selected WH.
6-86
NOTE About Zero adjustment

Zero adjustment of the blue weight head is performed. It is no possible to perform zero adjustment of the weigh unit and the dispersion unit together. When manual dump is set to "SYNC" in packer interlock set, zero adjustment will not be performed until the weigher receives the interlock signal from the packer. In this case, make the packer interlocked with weigher. When performing zero adjustment for the weigh hoppers, the products on them will be automatically discharged. Zero adjustment is performed while the Power switch is ON.
Perform zero adjustment again when the weight display of each head No. key is not within 0.00.1 g. Check the span again. (Next page)
Operation procedure of Span adjustment

1. Place the span adjustment weights on the weigh hoppers to perform span adjustment.
SPAN ADJUSTMENT WEIGHT
NOTE The standard span adjustment weight is 200.0g, but this varies with weigher model.
Fig. 6-99 Weigh Hopper
2. Press the head for the span adjustment to select. The selected head is displayed in blue. When adjusting all heads, press the All heads select / Clear key.
Fig. 6-100 Weigher Adjustment Menu
6-87
3. Press the WH span adjustment key. Span adjustment starts.
4. Confirm that the selected weigh hopper key reads 200.00.1g.
NOTE Confirm that the weigh hopper keys are 200.00.1g. When any weigh hopper key does not read 200.00.1g, repeat the procedures from step 2.
5. Remove the span adjustment weights from the weigh hoppers. Confirm that the selected weigh hopper keys reads 0.0 0.1g.
NOTE When any weigh hopper key does not read 0.0 0.1g, repeat the procedures from step 2 in "4.4.6 Zero Adjustment."
6-88
6.14.1.2 Combination Calculation

The Combination Calculation Menu appears by pressing the "Combination Calculation" tab with Manual adjustment. The Combination Calculation Menu is to display the result of the Combination Calculation.
NOTE The Combination Calculation Menu can be displayed at the over installation levels.
Fig. 6-104 Combination Calculation Menu
Table 6-50 Setting Items and Functions on the Combination Calculation Menu
No.
1
Setting item
Displays the combination result. Displays the weigh with combined. Combination Calculation only Feed after Combination Calculation
Display
Function
The combination result weight is displayed.
Displayed on the weight display menu.
Performs Combination Calculation only once. Does not feed.
Performs Combination Calculation only once, and feeds after weighing.
6-89
6.14.1.3 Vibration Monitor

The vibration monitor menu is displayed by pressing the "Vibration Monitor" tab at the manual adjustment. By displaying the output result of the four AFV sensors on the line graph, it is possible to check the status of the stagger of the main weigher visually and to check presence of vibration of the floor or the table the machine is set. Also AFV cell output result can be checked by opening and closing the hoppers and vibrating the weigher.
NOTE The vibration monitor menu can be displayed at the Installation or higher levels.
Fig. 6-105 Vibration Monitor Menu
Table 6-51 Setting Items and Functions on the Vibration Monitor Menu
No.
1 2
Setting item
Vibration Monitor Graph Range expansion key
Display
Function
The vibration monitor graph is displayed. Initial value of displayed range: + 160 counts to -160 counts Every pressing this key displays the displayed range field double. Maximum: + 1560 counts to - 1560 counts Every pressing this key displays the displayed range field half. Minimum: + 40 counts to - 40 counts Starts drain.
Area shrink key
Start Drive
Stop Drive
Stops drain.
Exit
6-90
6.14.2 Self-diagnosis Menu

Self-diagnosis Menu is displayed by selecting "Self-diagnosis" on the Machine Set Menu.
NOTE Self-diagnosis is accessible by the Installation or higher levels.
In the self-diagnosis menu, operations confirmation of the machine is performed. When you finish the self-diagnosis menu, press the Exit key.
Self-diagnosis items
1. Device check( 6.14.2.1 Device Check) 6.14.2.2 Input / Output junction signal)
2. Input/Output junction signal( 3. Network analyze(
6.14.2.3 Network Analyze) 6.14.2.4 Program number display)
4. Program number display( 5. Test drive(
6.14.2.5 Test Drive)
6.14.2.1 Device Check

Performs Device Check.
Fig. 6-106 Device Check Menu
6-91
Table 6-52 Setting Items and Functions of Device Check

No.
1
Setting item
Self-diagnosis
Function
Selects the item for self-diagnosis. DMU Backup memory Check: Perform DMU Checksum. "Test OK" appears after check when there is no abnormality. If there is, the detailed message "DMU Memory contents are broken. Perform memory initialization" appears. Communication check: The mechanism that makes a Network map request to WCU and WCU answers Network map to DMU. "Test OK" appears when it is normal. If not, the message "Network is not connected" appears. Liquid crystal chip check Lights up all in white for 3 seconds and turn off all for 2 seconds. Repeat this three times. Starts diagnosis of the selected items.
2 Execution key 3 Diagnosis result
Diagnosis result appears. When the problem is found, the detail is displayed in the area and the action key appears. Press the action key and the screen jump to the relevant menu.
6.14.2.2 Input / Output junction signal

Performs Junction signal Input/Output check.
Fig. 6-107 Input/Output junction signal menu
Table 6-53 Setting Items and Functions on the Input/Output junction signal menu
No.
1
Setting item
Relay unit Selection
Function
Selects the relay unit number. After selecting the relay unit, the position of the dipswitch on the screen changes. The number 0 to 2 can be set on the relay unit.
6-92
Table 6-53 Setting Items and Functions on the Input/Output junction signal menu (Continued)
No.
2
Setting item
Display Input/Output signal
Function
Displays the relay unit selected in the previous section. Select the Output name and the Output signal for the test at the output side to display the result of the test with the lamp. The Input name and the lamp are displayed at the input side. Selects Drain Completion Signal 1. Selects ON/OFF of Drain Completion Signal 1. Selects ON/OFF of Error signal 1. Selects ON/OFF of Error signal 2 Selects ON/OFF of Feed control signal 1. Selects ON/OFF of Feed control signal 2. Selects ON/OFF of Control signal 1. Selects ON/OFF of Control signal 2.
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Drain Completion Signal 1 lamp key Drain Completion Signal 2 lamp key Error signal 1 lamp key Error signal 2 lamp key Feed control signal 1 lamp key Feed control signal 2 lamp key Control signal 1 lamp key Control signal 2 lamp key
6.14.2.3 Network Analyze

This menu is to make a diagnosis of the network condition of each unit inside.
Fig. 6-108 Network Analyze Menu
6-93
Table 6-54 Setting Items and Functions on the Network Analyze Menu
No.
1
Setting item
Network map
Function
A Network map and a block diagram are displayed. Each Network status of WCU, ICU, and DMU are displayed. The Network status is displayed with the color of the line and the type of the line as below: Blue line: Normal Red line: Abnormal (Connected) Red dotted line: Abnormal (Disconnected) Creates Network maps around WCU. WCU, ICU, FRDV, FDC, DUC, and ADC are included. Creates Network maps around ICU. ICU, DMU, WCU, and EXC are included. Creates Network maps around DMU. DMU, ICU, and MHIC are included. The count which revised each unit communication is displayed. Outputs the status of each unit communication in a two-dimensional graph and the communication error count. * : Network exists. - : Network does not exist.
2 3 4 5 6
WCU ICU DMU Communication Error Count Output
6-94
6.14.2.4 Program number display

The program number information menu is a self-diagnosis menu and appears by pressing the program number display tab. The program number information menu displays the software information used in the machine. This function help you to confirm program information without seeing each board used in the machine. The information is kept until the main power is switched off. Match the network map information and use for connecting check of each unit. On the program number display screen, only participating networks appear in order that DMU receives the program number.
Fig. 6-109 Program Number Display Menu
Table 6-55 Setting Items and Functions on the Program Number Display Menu
No.
1 2 NAME NODE
Setting item
Function
The node number unit name on the front of the network map is displayed. The node number is displayed. Figure in hexadecimal. This is the same as the figure shown in the network map. For example, "5" of "5a" indicates the vertical axis of the network map and "a" indicates the horizontal axis. The program number is displayed. If the program has been up graded, the version number is displayed with the program number. The program revision number is displayed with the format **.**. The FDC numbers only are displayed among the FDC Switch number. Displays the setting of the dip switch on the FDC board. The set value is "0" or "4." 0: The FDC board is not checked or phase is not distributed. 4: Phase is distributed. The FDC numbers only are displayed among the power supply frequency. The FDC numbers only are displayed among the power supply voltage. Prints or outputs in file the program number information.
3 4 5
PROGRAM REVISION FDC switch
6 7 8
FDC Frequency FDC Power supply
Print key
6-95
If any part of the received program information is incorrect, a dashed line (- - - - -) will be displayed instead. "0" will be displayed for the FDC switch, frequency, and voltage, after the main power switch is turned on and before the power key is pressed.
6.14.2.5 Test Drive

The Test Drive Menu is displayed by pressing the Test Drive Tab on the self-diagnosis menu. In the Test Drive Menu, Feeder operation and the check of open/close operation of the hoppers are performed. Perform the test drive after selecting the head and parts to be driven.
Fig. 6-110 Test Drive Menu
Table 6-56 Key Names and Function on Test Drive Menu

No.
1
Name
Hopper key
Display
Function
Selects the weigh hopper.
All WH key
Selects all weigh hoppers or cancels.
DF key
Selects the dispersion feeders.
RF key
Selects the radial feeders.
PH key
Selects the pool hoppers.
WH key
Selects the weigh hoppers.
6-96
Table 6-56 Key Names and Function on Test Drive Menu (Continued)
No.
7 Start Drive
Name
Display
Function
Starts Test drive. (During drive, displayed in pale color.) Stops Test drive. (During drive, displayed in pale color.)
Stop drive
NOTE If the dispersion table, reject timing hopper, and timing hopper are equipped optionally, each key of DF, DTH, and TH are added.
Test Drive Procedure

1. On the test menu, press the key of the hopper or the feeder you want to drive to select. The selected hopper or the feeder is displayed in blue.
2. Press the Start Drive key. Test Drive starts.
6-97
3. Press the Stop drive key to end test drive. The hopper and the feeder stop driving.
Fig. 6-113 Test Drive Menu (on driving)
6-98
6.14.3 Layout Setting / Data Manager

Layout Setting / Data Manager menu is displayed by selecting "Layout Setting / Data Manager" on the Machine Set pop-up menu. On the Layout Setting / Data Manager menu, Layout Setting, Preset Manager, and Machine Set edition are performed.
6.14.3.1 Layout Setting

Layout Setting is to set the display method matching the place of the remote control.
Fig. 6-114 Layout Setting Menu
Table 6-57 Setting Items and Functions on the Layout Setting Menu
No.
1
Setting item
The First Machine Display Place Setting
Function
Sets which head is the first machine from the remote control. The illustration of this hopper is the key and displayed in blue by pressing it. With this setting, to adjust the weigher as you see is available.
6-99
6.14.3.2 Preset Manager

Performs copy or initialization of presetting.
NOTE Preset Manager is available at the installation level or over level.
Fig. 6-115 Preset Manager Menu
Table 6-58 Setting Items and Functions on the Preset Manager Menu
No.
1 Initialization key 2 3 4 5 6 Copy key 7 All selection key Selects all sources of copy. Copy source selection drop-down key Copy destination selection dropdown key List of copy source preset List of copy destination preset Selects the agent of the copy source from "Memory" and "Card." Selects the agent of the copy destination from "Memory" and "Card." Selects the preset number of the copy source. Selects the preset number of the copy destination. Execute preset copy from the copy source to the copy destination.
Setting item
Function
Initializes the preset contents of the selected preset number.
6.14.3.2.1 Preset Manager and Copy

This section explains the procedure to select and copy the preset registered in the memory or the card.
6-100
NOTE If the data has been already registered in the designated copy destination, the old data is overwritten by the new data by executing copy.
1. Press the copy source selection drop-down key and select the copy destination from "Memory" or "Card."
2. Press the preset number to be the copy source from the list of copy source preset. The selected preset source is displayed in blue. The number of preset copy source is displayed on the left of the copy key.
3. Press the copy destination selection drop-down key and select the copy destination from "Memory" or "Card."
6-101
4. Press the preset number of the copy destination from the list of copy destination preset. The selected preset item of the copy destination is displayed in blue. The preset number of the selected copy destination is displayed on the right of the copy key.
5. Press the Copy key. The message "Wait for a moment" appears and copy is executed.
The copied preset is displayed on the selected copy destination. Preset copy selection completes.
6.14.3.2.2 Coping all presets

This section explains the procedure to copy all preset registered in the memory or the card. When copying all selection, the copy is from the memory to the card, or the card to the memory.
6-102
NOTE Once all selection copy is executed, the old data is overwritten by the new data and the old data is lost.
1. Press the copy source selection drop-down key and select the copy source from "Memory" or "Card."
2. Press the All Selection key. All preset items are displayed in blue.
3. Press the copy destination selection drop-down key and select the destination from "Memory" or "Card."
6-103
4. Press the Copy key. The message "Wait for a moment" appears and copy is executed.
All selection preset copy terminates.
6.14.3.2.3 Selection and Initialization of Preset

This section explains the procedure to initialize a certain preset data. For initialization of the preset, use the list of the preset copy source. 1. Press the copy source selection drop-down key and select the place to initialize from "Memory" or "Card."
6-104
2. Press the preset number for initialization from the list of the preset copy source. The selected preset item of the copy source is displayed in blue.
3. Press the initialization key. The message "Wait for a moment" appears and initialization is executed.
6.14.3.2.4 Initialization of all presets

This section explains the procedure to initialize the all preset data. In the all preset initialization, use the list of the preset copy source. 1. Press the source copy selection drop-down key and select the copy source from "Memory" or "Card."
6-105
2. Press the all selection key. All preset items are displayed in blue.
3. Press the initialization key. The message "Wait for a moment" appears and initialization is executed.
All selection preset initialization completes.
6-106
6.14.3.3 Machine Set edition

On the Machine Set Edition Menu, copying and initialization of the Machine Set are performed.
NOTE Machine Set edition is available at the installation level or upper.
Fig. 6-134 Machine Set Edition Menu
Table 6-59 Setting Items and Functions on the Machine Set Edition Menu
No.
1 Initialization key 2 3 Copy key 4 5 6 7 All selection key Drop-down key of the copy destination selection List of the Machine Set item of the copy source List of the Machine Set item of the copy destination Copy source selection drop-down key Selects the agent of the copy source from "Memory" or "Card." Executes copy of the Machine Set item from the copy source to the copy destination. Selects the agent of the copy destination from "Memory" or "Card." Selects the Machine Set item from the copy source. The Machine Set items which can be copied are as following table. Machine Set items of the copy destination are displayed. Selects all sources of copy.
Setting item
Function
Initializes the selected Machine Set details.
6-107
Table 6-60 List of the Machine Set Edition Items

No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Number Machine Set item

Weight details setting Combination details setting Section division setting Feeder control specification setting Packer interlock specification setting Hopper open/close feature setting Feeder drive feature setting Frequency setting Program information Network analyze Span factor Network setting Timing auto setting
NOTE Machine Set items include the item that self-setting is not possible. Specially in initializing, be careful for item selection.
In the event of the accidental initialization of the item that self-setting is not possible, contact our service center.
6.14.3.3.1 Selection and copy of the Machine Set items

This section explains the procedure to select and copy the Machine Set items registered in the memory or the card. Copy is from the memory to the card, or from the card to the memory. Also, the number of the Machine Set item is fixed, therefore the copy to the different number is not available.
NOTE If the item has been already registered, the old data is overwritten by the new data.
6-108
1. Press the copy source selection drop-down key and select the copy source from "Memory" or "Card." It is also possible to press the copy destination selection drop-down key in order to select the copy destination from "Memory" or "Card."
2. Press the Machine Set item you want to copy to select. The selected item of both the source and the copy destination are displayed in blue. The selected Machine Set item number is displayed at the display unit on the both sides of the copy.
NOTE More than one item can not be selected at once.

3. Press the Copy key. Copy of the selected Machine Set item is executed.
6.14.3.3.2 Coping all Machine Set items

This section explains the procedure to copy all Machine Set items registered in the memory or the card. In the case of all selection copy, the copy is from the memory to the card, or the card to the memory.
6-109
NOTE Once All selection copy is executed, the old data is overwritten by the new data and the old data is lost.
1. Press the copy source selection drop-down key and select the copy source from "Memory" or "Card." It is also possible to press the copy destination selection drop-down key in order to select the copy destination from "Memory" or "Card."
2. Press the all selection key. All Machine Set items are displayed in blue. "ALL" is displayed on the display unit of the right and the left side of the copy key.
3. Press the copy key. Copy of all Machine Set items are executed.
6-110
6.14.3.3.3 Selection and initialization of the Machine Set item

This section explains the procedure to initialize a specified Machine Set data. To initialize the Machine Set item, use the list of the copy source Machine Set item.
NOTE Once initialized, the data cannot be recovered. Be sure you want to initialize before you do so.
1. Press the copy source selection drop-down key and select the place for initialization from "Memory" and "Card."
NOTE Do not use the copy destination selection drop-down key to avoid accidental deletion.
2. Press the Machine Set item you want to initialize to select. The selected item is displayed in blue.
6-111
3. Press the initialization key. Initialization of the selected Machine Set item is executed.
6.14.3.3.4 Initialization of all Machine Set items

This section explains the procedure to initialize all Machine Set data. To initialize all items, use the list of the copy source Machine Set items.
NOTE Once initialized, the data cannot be recovered. Be sure you want to initialize before you do so.
1. Press the copy source selection drop-down key and select the place for initialization from "Memory" and "Card."
NOTE Do not use the copy destination selection drop-down key to avoid accidental deletion.
6-112
2. Press the all selection key. All Machine Set items are displayed in blue.
3. Press the initialization key. Initialization of all selected Machine Set items is executed.
6-113
6.14.4 Parameters Setting

This section is to set the weigher for Combination Calculation of the inside of the weigher.
NOTE Parameters setting is accessibly by the Installation level and personnel in higher levels.
Settable items are as follows: Weight details setting( 6.14.4.1Weight details setting) 6.14.4.2Combination details setting) 6.14.4.3Section division setting)
Combination details setting( Section division setting(
6.14.4.1 Weight details setting

The weight details setting appears by pressing the weigh details setting tab on the parameters Setting Menu.
Fig. 6-147 Weight details Setting Menu
Table 6-61 Setting Items and Functions on the weight details Setting Menu
No.
1 2 3 4 5 Weight EMPTY JUDG. WT. key STABLE JUDG. WT. key STABLE COUNT key AUTO ZERO TOL. key
Setting item
Selects the weight. Selects either 400 g or 800 g.
Function
Sets the weight in which the weigh hopper will be judged empty using the ten-key. Sets the weight range within which weighing will be judged stable using the ten-key. Sets the number of times to check the stable judgment weight using the ten-key. Sets the tolerance weight for auto zero adjustment using the ten-key. Auto zero acceptable value can be set in the 0.1 - g weight.
6-114
Table 6-61 Setting Items and Functions on the weight details Setting Menu (Continued)
No.
6
Setting item
AUTO ZERO INTVL. key
Function
Sets the interval for performing auto zero adjustment using the ten-key. Usually the auto zero clearance is set at "5." When the auto zero clearance is set at "0," auto zero correction is not performed. Sets the digital filter No. In selecting the filter, consider the cut-off frequency and the weighing time. The low cut-off frequency makes less of vibration affect, however, make the weighing time longer and the speed of weighing slower. For the filter numbers, refer the Table 6-62Filter number list to select. Selects "No" or "Auto" for each filter number of the AFV function. Sets each number of filters from 0 to 4. (Only for the optional machines) Prints or outputs in file the set information.
FILTER key
8 9
AFV Printing
Table 6-62 Filter number list

Filter number
0 1 2 3 4
Cut-off frequency [Hz]

18 15 11 9 7
Filter time [mesc]

160 210 290 370 460
Weighing time [mesc] *

670 720 800 880 970
* Weighing times is a minimum time that the weight head can participate in the Combination Calculation. Even the shorter clearance of the interlock signal than the weighing time in the Table 6-62, it can not participate in weighing every time. The weighing times in the Table 6-62 are based on the formula below: (Weighing time) - (WH - PH holdup time) + (Combination Calculation time) + (Stable time) + (Filter time) = 130 + 20 + 360 + (Filter time)
6-115
6.14.4.2 Combination details setting
Fig. 6-148 Combination Details Setting Menu
Table 6-63 Setting Items and Functions on the Combination Details Setting Menu
No.
1
Setting item
COMPENSATION key
Function
Sets the compensation value to offset the influence of external vibration. When the weighing value is set at 100.0 g and the Compensation Value is set at 0.6 g, the Combination Calculation is performed with the target weight of 100.6 g. The minimum set unit of the Compensation Value is 0.1 g and the value from 0.0 to 25.5 can be set. Generally the Compensation Value is set at 0.6 g. This function minimizes the deterioration of efficiency by the external vibration, find the optimal correction for yielding, and renew it automatically. Select whether the Compensation Value auto updating is performed or not. Yes: Performs the Compensation Value auto updating. No: Does not perform the Compensation Value auto updating. Prints or outputs in file the set information.
AUTO COMP. REVISION key
3 Printing 4 Actions on error
Refer to the next table.
Table 6-64 Setting Items and Functions for Actions on Error

No.
5 6 7 8
Key/Setting item
Zero error PH, WH, BH hopper error Overscale error Number of error nonparticipation heads
Function
Selects the action on zero error among "Auto cancel," "Stop," and "Not participate." Selects the action on PH, WH, BH hopper error among "Auto cancel," "Stop," and "Not participate." Selects the action on overscale error among "Auto cancel," "Stop," and "Not participate." Set the error nonparticipation heads count using the ten key. Once the numbers of errors are over the previously set number of heads, driving stops. "0" is set as "Auto drain."
6-116
Table 6-64 Setting Items and Functions for Actions on Error (Continued)
No.
9
Key/Setting item
Number of overweight error stops
Function
Sets the action on overweight error (in the case that the results of Combination Calculation are more than the upper limit only). Setting "0" drains the overweigh combination even if they are the same as upper limit. Setting "1" to "15" stops operation when the overweight products occur continuously more than the set times. Normally set "4." Selects if the every stability head check is performed. Select the action on error after rechecking between "Auto drain" or "Stop." Select the action on TH, DTH, RS whopper error among "Auto reset" or "Stop."
10 11 12
Every stability head check Recheck error TH, DTH, RS whopper error
6-117
6.14.4.3 Section division setting

Section division setting sets the weight head to drive at each section. Generally, the section division setting is not necessary as it is already designed as per customer's specification at delivery.
Fig. 6-149 Section division Setting Menu
Table 6-65 Setting Items and Functions on the Section Division Setting Menu
No.
1 2 3 Print key 4 5 Delete key Maximum head number Sets the maximum head number to drive on the section by the ten-key. Setting range: 1 to Maximum head number Deletes selected section division.
Setting item
Parameter selection Minimum head number
Function
Selects the section of the parameter number you want to set. Sets the minimum head number to drive on the section by the ten-key. Setting range: 1 to Maximum head number Prints or outputs in file the set information.
6-118
6.14.5 Weigher setting

Weigher Setting Menu appears by pressing "Machine Set" on the Machine Set pop-up menu.
NOTE Machine Set is accessible by the Installation level or personnel in higher levels.
6.14.5.1 Participating Machine Set

Selects the hopper to participate in weighing. This setting is used when excluding a certain hopper due to failures.
Fig. 6-150 Participating Machine Set Menu
Table 6-66 Setting Items and Functions on the Participating Machine Set Menu
No.
1 2
Setting item
Head key ALL HD. SLCT/CLR key
Function
The head whose number has been pressed participates in weighing. The participating head is displayed in blue. Selects all heads or cancels the selection.
6-119
6.14.5.2 AFD Setting

The AFD Setting Menu appears by pressing the AFD setting tab in the weigher setting. On the AFD Setting Menu, Set AFD setting to the whole weigher.
Fig. 6-151 AFD Setting Menu
Table 6-67 Setting Items and Functions on the AFD Setting Menu
No.
1 2
Setting item
Head number decreasing AFD stop function Cleaning request notice
Function
Sets the head number to stop AFD. AFD stops when the number of the participating heads reaches to the set value. Sets if the necessity of the feeder cleaning is noticed. Yes: Notice. No: Does not notice.
6-120
6.14.6 Peripheral devise setting

The peripheral Setting Menu appears by selecting "Peripheral devise setting" on the Machine Set popup menu. The settable items on the peripheral Setting Menu are Packer interlock specification setting and Packer details specification setting.
NOTE The peripheral devise setting is reachable by the Installation level or personnel in higher levels.
6.14.6.1 Packer interlock specification setting

This section explains the procedure to interlock the machine and the packer.
Fig. 6-152 Packer Interlock Specification Setting Menu
Table 6-68 Setting Items and Functions on the Packer Interlock Specification Setting Menu
No.
1 2
Key / Setting item

Parameter number selection drop-down key Packer Interlock Setting
Function
Selects the parameter number of the Packer Interlock Specification to be set and referred. Displays the Packer Interlock Setting Menu ( 6.14.6.1.1Packer Interlock Setting)
RS
Displays the RS menu. ( 6.14.6.1.2Ring Shutter Setting) Displays the DTH menu. Displays the TH menu. Prints or outputs in file the set details.
4 5 6
DTH TH Print key
6-121
TIP
The setting of the reject timing hopper and timing hopper is the same procedure of that of the Ring Shutter Setting. For the setting procedure, refer to the ring shutter(6.14.6.1.2Ring Shutter Setting)
6.14.6.1.1 Packer Interlock Setting

This setting is to interlock the machine and the packer.
Fig. 6-153 Packer Interlock Setting Menu
Table 6-69 Setting Items and Functions on the Packer Interlock Setting Menu
No.
1 2
Setting item
Drain signal On Time
Function
Sets the output time of the drain termination signal by the ten-key. Settable by 10 msec.
Interlock signal in timely Selects the interlock signal either self-driving or synchronous when the number of weighing button discharges are more than 2 (Timely weighing). Self-driving: Perform the only first discharge with the interlock signal from the packer, and with the self-driving timer of the machine from the next discharge. Synchronous: Perform drains with the interlock signal from the packer. Drain signal button in timely weighing Selects the output timing of the drain termination signal from either the first time or the last time when the number of discharges are more than 2 (Timely weighing). The first time: Outputs the drain termination signal after the first weighed product discharge. The last time: Outputs the drain termination signal after the last weighed product discharge. Selects the interlock method between the machine and the packer from "Slave," "Master," "Stroke on Demand," "Bug on Demand," and "Special interlock." Selects the drain by Interlock signal radio button in manual operation from either "Yes" or "No." No: Automatically drains without entering the interlock signal. Yes: Drains by the interlock signal from the packer.
4 5
Interlock drop-down key Interlock signal radio button in manual operation
6-122
Table 6-69 Setting Items and Functions on the Packer Interlock Setting Menu (Continued)
No.
6
Setting item
Drain signal radio button in manual operation
Function
Selects if the drain termination signal is output in Drain, Zero adjustment and Error drain. No: Does not output the drain termination signal in Drain, Zero adjustment and Error drain. Yes: Outputs the drain termination signal in Drain, Zero adjustment and Error drain.
6.14.6.1.2 Ring Shutter Setting
Fig. 6-154 Ring Shutter Setting Menu
Table 6-70 Setting Items and Functions on the Ring Shutter Setting Menu
No.
1 2 3 4 5 6
Setting item
Use button Selects if the ring shutter is used.
Function
Parameter selection drop- Selects the parameter to set Packer interlock. down key RS drop-down key Minimum head number Maximum head number Pool button in timely weighing Selects the parameter to set the ring shutter. (See the reference.) Sets the minimum head number by the ten-key. Setting range is within 1 to the maximum head number. Sets the maximum head number by the ten-key. Setting range is within 1 to the maximum head number. Selects either discharging products pooling by one weighing or not when setting the number of discharging on the each product Setting Menu. No: Discharges without pooling. Yes: Discharges by one weighing pool. Selects either discharging products pooling one cycle or not. No: Discharges without pooling. Yes: Discharges by one weighing pool. Selects the EXC number set on the network setting (operated on the Maintenance level or the higher levels).
Cycle pool button
EXC number selection drop-down key
6-123
Table 6-70 Setting Items and Functions on the Ring Shutter Setting Menu (Continued)
No.
9 10 11
Setting item
EXC port number Drain direction button Number of steps
Function
Selects the XC port number from "J 411," "J 412," "J 413," and "J414." Selects the drain direction from either "Proper weight / Direction 1" or "Fault / Direction 2." Sets the steps from WH by the ten-key. Setting range is from 0 to 8.
NOTE Settable RS parameter numbers are as follows:

As for the minimum head number, the maximum head number, Pool in timely weighing, and the Cycle pool, up to 8 patterns (total 32 patterns) are settable per parameter of the packer interlock specification. As for the EXC number selection, EXC port number, Drain direction and the steps from WH, the setting is available by the packer interlock specification parameter (total 4 pattern).
Refer to the table below to the operations for each combination of the multi dump and the cycle settings. Table 6-71 Combination of Multi Dump and Cycle
Multi dump
NO POOL NO POOL POOL POOL
Cycle
NO POOL POOL POOL NO POOL Product will not be pooled.
Operation
Product will be pooled for one cycle, but not pooled for one weighing. Product will be pooled for one weighing.
TIP
A "cycle" means a flow from weighing to discharge. For example, if the dump count is set to "3" during multi dump, one weighing (to obtain the target weight) consists of three cycles. When the dump count is set to "1", one weighing consists of one cycle.
6-124
6.14.6.1.3 Reject Timing Hopper Setting

This menu is to be set in using the reject timing hopper.
Fig. 6-155 Reject Timing Hopper Setting Menu
For settings, take the same procedure of "Ring Shutter Setting."
6.14.6.1.4 Timing Hopper Setting
Fig. 6-156 Timing Hopper Setting Menu
For settings, take the same procedure of "Ring Shutter Setting."
6-125
6.14.6.2 Feeder Details Setting

This menu is to be set in interlocking the machine and the feeder.
Fig. 6-157 Feeder Details Setting Menu
Table 6-72 Setting Items and Functions on the Feeder details Setting Menu
No.
1 2 3
Key / Setting item

No. OF INFEEDER key Feeder number selection drop-down key Minimum head number Sets the number of infeeders.
Function
Switching-selects the feeder number for following settings. Sets the minimum head number by the ten-key to designate the feeder 1 or 2 as a product feed section. Setting range is within 1 to the maximum head number. Sets the maximum head number by the ten-key to designate the feeder 1 or 2 as a product feed section. Setting range is within 1 to the maximum head number. Selects the method to control the products conveyed to the dispersion table by either weight or volume. Weight method: Controls the products conveyed to the dispersion table by weight. Photoelectric method: Controls the products conveyed to the dispersion table by volume.
Maximum head number
Feed control method button
Feed control holdup time key Sets the minimum time regarded that the products are pooled on the dispersion table by the ten-key. When over / shortage of the products is detected after the previously set time, the feeder turns ON/OFF.But the shorter time than the set time is ignored to avoid frequent turning ON/OFF of the feeder. Set region: 0.0 to 25.5 sec This method is available only when the feed control method is the photoelectric method.
6-126
Table 6-72 Setting Items and Functions on the Feeder details Setting Menu (Continued)
No.
7
Key / Setting item
Function
Feed shortage detect time key Sets the time regarded that feeding of the products from the feeder to the machine is interrupted. If detecting shortage of the products is continued after the previously set time, the machine regards that the feeding of the products is interrupted, stops operation, and displays the message "Low Product." When the auto stop is not requested, set "0." Setting range: 0 to 255 sec
6-127
6-128
7 USEFUL FUNCTIONS
7.1 7.2 7.3 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 New product registration quoting registered product data 7-2
Copy and edition of registered product data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Using Feeder Adjustment Function on the DRAIN Menu . . . . . . 7-4 Using the Full Open Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
7.2.1 7.3.1 7.3.2
Changing the Production Method Quickly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
<MEMO>
7 USEFUL FUNCTIONS
7
7.1
USEFUL FUNCTIONS
Summary
This chapter describes the useful functions in this weigher. Use these functions as required.
< Contents >

Advanced operations
< Intention >

To understand and master advanced operations
< Intended reader >

7-1
7 USEFUL FUNCTIONS
7.2
New product registration quoting registered product data
This section describes how to register new product data using the product settings registered as preset.
7.2.1
Copy and edition of registered product data
<Purpose>
The registered product data can be copied, quoted, and registered as a new product data. To quote and create the product data, follow the procedure below: 1. Create copy data following the procedure"6.14.3.2.1 Preset Manager and Copy" and press the Exit key the Main Menu. to return to
2. Press the Select Preset key on the Main Menu. The Select Preset Menu appears.
Fig. 7-2 Main Menu
7-2
7 USEFUL FUNCTIONS
3. Select the preset number copied in the procedure 1. (No.3) The Main Menu opening the selected preset number appears.
4. Press the Select Preset key Menu. Preset Menu appears.
on the Main
Fig. 7-4 Main Menu screen
5. Change the desired preset items. (Example: Target weight value to be from 90 to 100)
7-3
7 USEFUL FUNCTIONS
7.3
Changing the Production Method Quickly
This section explains the method to drain remaining products faster in order to shorten the time for changing the production method after weighing one product.
7.3.1
Using Feeder Adjustment Function on the DRAIN Menu
Remaining products can be dumped by using drain function. Follow the procedure described below to set the drain function.
1. Press the DRAIN key
on the main menu.
The DRAIN menu will appear. Drain starts.
Fig. 7-6 Main Menu
2. Press the Feeder Adjustment Tab. The FEEDER ADJUST menu will appear.
Fig. 7-7 DRAIN Menu
7-4
7 USEFUL FUNCTIONS
3. Press the RF time lamp key
and RF
AMP lamp key , select Production time and Production AMP and set the larger number for each value by pressing Increase key .
TIP
When a larger value is set, products can be drained faster.
NOTE The value should be the maximum value which does not cause product jam in the collection chute of the machine, the packer, and so on.
Changed feeder adjustment value is not reflected in the preset.
7.3.2
Using the Full Open Function
When the product size is enough not to cause product jam in each hopper or the collection chute, the product can be dumped by using the Full open lock function. Follow the procedure described below to set the full open function.
1. Press the FULL OPEN LOCK key the main menu.
on
The FULL OPEN LOCK menu will appear. 2. Select all hoppers.
Fig. 7-9 Main Menu
7-5
7 USEFUL FUNCTIONS
3. Press the Open key Open each hopper.
Fig. 7-10 FULL OPEN LOCK Menu
4. Press the FEEDER ADJUST tab. The FEEDER ADJUST menu will appear.
Fig. 7-11 FULL OPEN LOCK Menu
5. Press the RF time lamp key
and RF
AMP lamp key , select Production time and production AMP and set the larger number for each value by pressing Increase key .
TIP
Making each set value larger helps faster products drain.
NOTE Changed feeder adjustment value is not reflected in the preset.
7-6
8.1 8.2 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Parent and Child Weighing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8-2 8-2 8-2 8-4 8-7 8-9 8-10 8-12 8-14 8-15 8-17
8.2.1 Types of Parent and Child Weighing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2.1.1 Parent and Child Mix Weighing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2.1.2 Bonus Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2.2 Setting Items Related to Parent and Child Weighing . . . . . . . . . 8.2.3 Procedures to Set Parent and Child Weighing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2.4 PRODUCTION Menu during Parent and Child Weighing. . . . . .
8.3
Count Priority Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

Setting Items Related to Count Priority Program . . . . . . . . . . . Piece Weight Revision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedures to Set Count Priority Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitoring Menus Displayed during Count Priority Program . . Count setting output during driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.3.1 8.3.2 8.3.3 8.3.4 8.3.5
<MEMO>
8
8.1
OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS
Summary
This chapter describes the optional functions set in the weigher separately.
<Contents>
Count priority program Parent and child weighing
<Intention>
To understand and master optional functions
<Intended reader>
System managers
8-1
8.2
Parent and Child Weighing
"Parent and child weighing" is a method to discharge the products from the specified heads (parent heads) in each weighing while performing mix weighing.
TIP
The heads other than the parent heads are called "child heads." When performing parent and child weighing, a mechanical device is required to prevent the products for the child heads from being infed to the parent heads .
8.2.1
Types of Parent and Child Weighing
The standard specification mix weighing is based on the result of the combination calculation of each weighed product, however, the parent-child weighing mix-weighs based on the result of the parent head weighing. There are two types of parent and child weighing: one is "parent and child mix weighing" and another is "bonus adding.
8.2.1.1
Parent and Child Mix Weighing
"Parent and child mix weighing" is a method to include the weight of the parent heads in the target weight. (The parent heads participate in combination weighing.) The weigher first weighs the products in the parent heads. Based on the weight of the parent heads, the weigher calculates the target weight for the child heads. Target weight for child heads = target weight - weight of parent heads Example) If the target weight is 200.0g and the weight of the parent heads is 30.5g, the target weight for the child heads is: 200.0-30.5 = 169.5 (g) Thus, combination weighing is performed with the child heads with the target weight of 169.5g. If the combination weight of the child heads is proper, the products in the parent and child heads will be discharged simultaneously. The weight of discharged products will be the target weight (approximately 200.0g).
8.2.1.2
Bonus Adding
"Bonus Adding" is a weighing method which does not include the parent head weight in the target weight value. (The parent head is not included in weighing.) The equipment combination-calculates the target weight value as a child head target value. The child target value = Target weight value If the result of the child combination calculation is the proper weight, the equipment dumps the parent head and the combination-calculated child head together. Example) When the target weight value is 200.0 g and the parent head weight is 30.5 g, 200.0+30.5 = 230.5 (g)
8-2
The dumped product weight becomes the target weight value + the parent head valued (approx. 230.5 g).
8-3
8.2.2
Setting Items Related to Parent and Child Weighing
Parent and child weighing can be activated on the PRODUCT SET menu. The related setting items will be added to the PRODUCT SET menu. Refer to the table below for the setting items related to parent and child weighing.
Fig. 8-1 Parent-Child Setting Menu (Preset)
Table 8-1 Setting Items Related to Parent and Child Weighing (1)
No.
1
Setting item
Parent child
Sets whether to activate parent and child weighing. "ON": Activates parent and child weighing. "OFF": The weigher performs standard weighing. Select "1" or "2" as a parent head count. Sets whether the parent heads participate in combination weighing. "ON": Performs parent and child mix weighing. "OFF": Performs bonus adding. Sets the interval to perform zero adjustment for the parent heads. "0": Zero adjustment will not be performed for the parent heads. "Number greater than 0": Zero adjustment will be performed for the parent heads. The set number indicates the discharge count of the parent heads. For example, if this item is set to "100", zero adjustment will be performed every 100 times the parent heads discharge products.
2 3
Parent head count Parent calculate
Parent zero adjust
NOTE If the auto zero interval is set to "0" on the WEIGH SPEC SET menu, zero adjustment will not be performed.
Parent dump mode
Sets whether to discharge the products in each parent head alternately or simultaneously, when the number of parent heads is set to "2." When "ALTERNATE" is set, the products in P1 will be discharged first, then those in P2 will be discharged. When "SIMULTANEOUS" is set, the products in each parent head will be discharged simultaneously.
8-4
Table 8-1 Setting Items Related to Parent and Child Weighing (1) (Continued)
No.
6
Setting item
Action over upper limit
Select an action against the case when the parent head weight is over the upper weight limit to be set later. "ParentD" : Dumps parent heads only. "P&C Dump" : Dumps both the parent heads and child heads.
NOTE If the parent heads are in full-scale, the alarm buzzer will sound and no product will be discharged.
Action in under the parent Select an action against the case when the parent head weight is under the lower weight head lower limit limit to be set later. "ParentD" : Dumps parent heads only. "Additional Feed": Does not dump but performs the additional feed.
NOTE If the parent heads are under-scale (weight is minus side), additional feeding will not be performed, but the alarm buzzer will sound.
Parent Head Setting
Displays the Parent Head Setting Menu.
When the parent head count is set to "2", the following setting items should be set for each parent head. When changing the parent heads count to "2" without setting the parent head, the parent head setting index blinks to urge the parent head setting.
Fig. 8-2 Parent head Setting Menu
8-5
Table 8-2 Setting Items Related to Parent and Child Weighing (2)
No.
1
Setting item
Parent head No.
Sets the weigh head No. of the parent head.
NOTE Set this item within the range of the weigh head Nos. contained in the section. If the weigh head No. is not contained in that section, the alarm buzzer will sound.
Parent upper weight
Sets the upper weight for the parent head. When the weight of the parent head is equal to or less than this value, the products in that parent head will be discharged.
NOTE If the value which is over the parent head upper limit is set, the keys of the parent head upper limit and the parent head lower limit blink to urge correction.
Parent lower weight
Sets the lower weight for the parent head. When the weight of the parent head is equal to or greater than this value, the products in that parent head will be discharged.
NOTE If the value which is over the parent head upper limit is set, the keys of the parent head upper limit and the parent head lower limit blink to urge correction.
Radial feeder drive
Select either driving on or off the parent head radial feeder. On: Drives the parent head radial feeder. Off: Does not drive the parent head radial feeder.
NOTE The radial feeders for the parent heads will not be automatically controlled.
Infeed delay
Sets the time from when the pool hopper of the parent head opens until when the infeed signal is output to the external device. Setting range: 0 to 2550 msec by the 10 msec
8-6
8.2.3
Procedures to Set Parent and Child Weighing
Follow the procedure described below to set parent and child weighing.
1. Press the Preset key
on the Main Menu.
The Preset Menu appears.
Fig. 8-3 Main Menu
2. Press the "Parent-Child Setting" on the right side of the menu. The Parent-Child Setting Menu appears.
TIP
Parent head infeed delay can be set on the timing adjustment in the right figure.
3. Press the Parent-Child setting button to select "On" or "Off." 4. Press the Parent head count button to select 1 or 2. 5. Press the Parent head participation button to select "On" or "Off." 6. Press the Parent zero adjustment clearance key to set the value on the displayed ten-key pad. 7. Press the Parent dump mode button to select "Alternate" or "Simul. 8. Press the Action over Upper Limit button and select either "ParentD..." or "P&C Dump." 9. Press the Action under Lower Limit button and select either "ParentD..." or "Add'nl Feed."
Fig. 8-5 Parent-Child Setting Menu
8-7
10. Press the "Parent Head Setting" on the right on the menu. The Parent Head Setting Menu appears.
TIP
When the parent count is set at "2," the parent head selection drop-down key appears.
Fig. 8-6 Parent-Child Setting Menu
11. Press the Parent Head No. key to set the value via the displayed ten-key pad. 12. Press the Parent Upper Wt. key to set the value via the displayed ten-key pad. 13. Press the Parent Lower Wt. key to set the value via the displayed ten-key pad. 14. Press the parent head radial feeder drive button to select "ON" or "Off." 15. Press the Infeed Delay key to set the value via the displayed ten-key pad. 16. Press the Exit key The screen returns to the Main Menu.
Fig. 8-7 Parent head Setting Menu (Parent-Child weighing)
8-8
8.2.4
PRODUCTION Menu during Parent and Child Weighing
The weights of the parent heads will be added to the PRODUCTION menu during parent and child weighing as shown below.
<PRODUCTION menu during parent and child weighing>
Fig. 8-8 PRODUCTION Menu during Parent and Child Weighing
Table 8-3 Descriptions of the PRODUCTION Menu during Parent and Child Weighing
No.
1 2 Parent head No. Weight of the parent head
Name
8-9
8.3
Count Priority Program
Count priority program is a method to set the target not by weight, but by the piece count of the products. During combination weighing, the weight of the products infed to each weigh hopper will be converted to a piece count based on the average single piece weight.
8.3.1
Setting Items Related to Count Priority Program
Count setting is performed on the Preset Menu. The setting item regarding to the count setting is added on the Preset Menu.
Fig. 8-9 Count Setting Menu (Preset)
Table 8-4 Setting Items Related to Count Priority Program

No.
1
Setting item
Target count Sets the target count.
NOTE Set "0" to deactivate count priority program.
2 3 4
Upper count Lower count Piece weight
Sets the allowable upper deviation of the piece count when it exceeds the target count. If this item is set to "0", a combination that exceeds the target count will not be made. Sets the allowable lower deviation of the piece count when it is below the target count. If this item is set to "0", a combination that is below the target count will not be made. Sets the weight of a single piece. The piece count of the products in each weigh hopper will be calculated based on this weight.
8-10
Table 8-4 Setting Items Related to Count Priority Program (Continued)

No.
5
Setting item
Piece Weight Revision Method
Sets whether to activate the function to revise the piece weight when the piece weight varies ("1/1, 1/2, 1/4", or "OFF"). When this item is set to "OFF", the piece count of the products in each hopper will be calculated based on the set piece weight. When the piece weight varies, activate this function (1/1, 1/2, or 1/4), the piece weight will be automatically revised and the piece count of the products in each hopper will be calculated based on the revised piece weight. Select 1/1, 1/2, or 1/4 to activate this function according of the variation of piece weight. In most instances, you should select "1/1." 1/1: Select 1/1, if a mistake in the conversion of weight to piece count does not occur, when the target count of products are infed to one head. 1/2: Select 1/2, if a mistake in the conversion of weight to piece count does not occur, when half of the target count of products are infed to one head. 1/4: Select 1/4, if a mistake in the conversion of weight to piece count does not occur, when one-quarter of the target count of products are infed to one head.
TIP
Refer to "8.3.2 Piece Weight Revision" for details of the piece weight revision.
NOTE In count priority program, combination weighing will be performed based on the piece count of products, then the combination weight will be checked if it is within the range between (target weight - lower limit) and (target weight + upper limit). If the combination weight is not within this range, the products will not be discharged. Note this when setting the upper count. A setting example is described below. Example) If the target count is 10 pieces, the upper count is 1 piece, and the piece weight is 5.00g (4.80 - 5.20g): Target weight: 50.0g (5.0010) Lower limit: 2.0g (50.0-4.8010) Upper limit: 7.0g (5.2011-50.0)
Target Count 10 Piece Upper Count 11 Piece
-2.0g
Lower Limit
50.0g
Target Limit
+7.0g
Upper Limit
8-11
TIP
Auto setting of Target count value, Upper count limit, and Lower count limit
When inputting the target count, upper count, lower count, piece weight, and piece weight revision, each value of the target weight, upper limit, and lower limit will be set automatically as follows. (Target count and the piece weight should not be "0.") Target weight value = target countPiece weight Upper weight limit = Upper countPiece weight + Piece weight 2 / (in the case that auto revision: 1/1) = Upper weightPiece weight + Piece weight (in the case that auto revision: 1/2) = Upper weightPiece weight + 2Piece weight (in the case that auto revision: 1/4) = Upper weightPiece weight + 2Piece weight (in the case of Off at revision of Piece weight) Lower weight limit = Lower countPiece weight + Piece weight 2 / (in the case that auto revision: 1/1) = Lower weightPiece weight + Piece weight (in the case that auto revision: 1/2) = Lower weightPiece weight + 2Piece weight (in the case that auto revision: 1/4) = Lower weightPiece weight + 2Piece weight (in the case of No at revision of Piece weight) The auto set upper and lower weight limit are the values that are not checked in the recheck even the piece weights are various within the range without miscount-conversion.
8.3.2
Piece Weight Revision
If this function is activated, the piece weight will be revised in the range that the weigher can recognize the piece count of products infed to each weigh hopper. This range is called the piece weight revision range. Usually, where TC: target count, PW: piece weight, and PWRev: piece weight revision (1/1, 1/2, 1/4), the piece weight revision range is PW ( 1-(1 / ( 2TC PWRev ))) < piece weight revision range < PW ( 1+(1 / ( 2TC PWRev )))
For example, where Target count value: 20 pieces, piece weight: 5.0g, and piece weight revision: 1/1, 5 ( 1-(1 / ( 2 20 1 / 1 ))) < piece weight revision range < 5 ( 1+(1 / ( 2 20 1 / 1 ))) 4.875g < piece weight revision range < 5.125g In this example, the piece weight will be automatically revised in the range between 4.875g and 5.125g every 5 cycles. The range that can be recognized by each weigh hopper is 1 to 20. ("20" is the Target count value.) If the revised piece weight exceeds the piece weight revision range, an error (PW ERROR) will be displayed and the weigher will stop production.
8-12
The piece weight revision ranges based on this example are shown in the table below. Table 8-5 Piece Weight Revision Ranges
Setting of piece weight revision
1/1 1/2 1/4
Piece weight revision range (Target count value: 20 pieces, piece weight: 5g)
4.875g < piece weight revision range < 5.125g 4.75g < piece weight revision range < 5.25g 4.5g < piece weight revision range < 5.5g
Recognition range
1 to 20 pieces 1 to 10 pieces 1 to 5 pieces
When the piece weight revision is set to 1/1, the piece weight revision range will be narrowed. On the other hand, the number of products that each weigh hopper can recognize will increase. When the piece weight revision range is set to 1/4, piece weight revision range will be widened. On the other hand, the number of products that each weigh hopper can recognize will decrease.
8-13
8.3.3
Procedures to Set Count Priority Program
Follow the procedure described below to set count priority program.
1. Press the preset key
on the Main Menu.
The Preset Menu appears.
Fig. 8-10 Main Menu (W - machine)
2. Press the "Count setting" on the right side of the menu. The count Setting Menu appears.
3. Press the target count value to set the value on the displayed ten-key pad. 4. Press the upper count limit to set the value on the displayed ten-key pad. 5. Press the lower count limit to set the value on the displayed ten-key pad. 6. Press the piece weight key to set the value on the displayed ten-key pad. 7. Press the piece weight revision button to select among "Off," "1 / 1," "1/2," or "1 / 4." Normally set at "1 / 1." 8. Press the Exit key .
Fig. 8-12 Count Setting Menu
8-14
8.3.4
Monitoring Menus Displayed during Count Priority Program
On the Driving menu of the count setting, the combination count menu and the piece weight revision result display menu are added.
Fig. 8-13 Select Display menu
Table 8-6 Display screen of the Count setting

No.
1
Name
Combination weight
Example
Fig. 8-14 Combination count

2 Combination count
Fig. 8-15 Combination count
8-15
Table 8-6 Display screen of the Count setting (Continued)

No.
3
Name
Piece weight revision result
Example
Fig. 8-16 Piece weight revision result

4 Weight display
Fig. 8-17 Weight display
8-16
8.3.5
Count setting output during driving
In the count setting mode, output data is replaced to the count display mode from the weight display mode.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
(Continued from the left side)
11
(Continues to the right side)
Fig. 8-18 Current total output (example)
Table 8-7 Output content list

No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Product code Product name Proper dump count Target count value Total number of discharged products Average count Standard deviation
Name
8-17
Table 8-7 Output content list (Continued)

No.
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Maximum count Minimum count (Maximum count) - (minimum count) Maximum piece weight Minimum piece weight Average piece weight Count per piece with the sign *
Name
8-18
9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 Before Washing and Sterilizing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Methods of Washing and Sterilizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Washing and Sterilizing Procedures for Each Unit and Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
9.4.1 Removable unit cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 9.4.1.1 Inlet Chute. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 9.4.1.2 Dispersion Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 9.4.1.3 Radial Trough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10 9.4.1.4 Pool and Weigh Hoppers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11 9.4.1.5 Collection Chutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12 9.4.1.6 Discharge Chutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13 9.4.1.7 Timing Hopper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14 9.4.2 Cleaning Unremovable Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15 9.4.2.1 Main Unit, Dispersion Unit, and Drive Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16 9.4.2.2 Remote Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
<MEMO>
9
9.1
CLEANUP PROCEDURES
Summary
This chapter describes procedures for cleaning the weigher components. The method of cleaning should be adapted to product characteristics. Before cleaning, drain all products from the weigher. ( 6.7 Drain Menu)
WARNING
When cleaning each part, turn off the main power switch and lock the main power switch. The operator is required to hold the key during operation.
< Contents >

Cleanup procedures and period
< Intention >

To understand and master the mounting, removing, and cleaning procedures of each component in order to prevent foreign matters from getting in and to keep the weigher in hygienic condition
< Intended reader >

9-1
9.2
Before Washing and Sterilizing
The weigher itself is a waterproof structure (IP-65), however physical damage is expected in case of the over cleaning more than the stipulated range or mishandling. The machine managers are required to check that the cleaning method is understood and cleaning is performed properly during cleaning.
WARNING
Be sure not to use any washing method except for the method mentioned below.
About machine washing and drying the machine

This machine is composed of the removable units and the unremovable units. As for the removable units, be sure to remove from the machine and follow the washing method of each item in "9.4.1Removable unit cleaning" to wash and dry. As for the unremovable units, be sure to follow the washing method of each item in "9.4.2Cleaning Unremovable Unit" to wash and dry, and also follow the items below for washing and drying.
Dispersion feeder Feeder cover part Rubber cover
Inside Diameter 6.3mm
Drive Weigh Unit
1.5m
Fig. 9-1 Main unit washing
1. Remove remaining residue from the surface of each part with a soft cloth. 2. Washing method a. After removing with the soft cloth filled with designated cleaning liquid (neutral detergent) and wipe water. b. When cleaning with a hose, after spraying the designated cleaning liquid (natural detergent), wash out with the water volume designated below and wipe with a soft cloth.
9-2
For cleaning, set the condition that the inside diameter of the hose is 6.3 mm and water raise up to 1.5 m when the belching mouth is pointed upper. (The guide is the water volume that pools approx. 10.5 l / min at water pressure approx. 18 kPa.)
3. To avoid residue of the products from remaining, perform washing and drying everyday.
CAUTION
Be careful about overload since the Weigh Drive unit and the dispersion feeder unit are joined to the weight sensor. For cleaning the rubber cover attached to the feeder cover, do not use the tools such as brushes and sharp parts.
Cleaning and drying method of the Weigh Drive unit periphery

We described the cleaning and drying methods of the unremovable units. Especially, since the precision parts are attached around the Weigh Drive unit, be sure to follow the item below for cleaning and drying.
cm
50
6.3mm
ov er
1.5m
Diaphragm The part directly connected to the weigh sensor Expansion figure of drive weigh unit
Fig. 9-2 Expansion figure of drive weighing unit
1. Remove remaining residue from the surface of each part with a soft cloth. 2. Washing method a. After removing with the soft cloth filled with designated cleaning liquid (neutral detergent) and wipe water. b. When cleaning with a hose, after spraying the designated cleaning liquid (natural detergent), wash out with the water volume designated below and wipe with a soft cloth. For cleaning, set the condition that the inside diameter of the hose is 6.3 mm and water raise up to 1.5 m when the belching mouth is pointed upper. (The guide is the water volume that pools approx. 10.5 l / min at water pressure approx. 18 kPa.)
45
9-3
Keep approx. 45 C of the hose angle and 50 cm or more distance from the machine for cleaning.
CAUTION
Avoid intensive water-discharging or direct water-discharging as it may damage the diagram.
3. Use the neutral detergent for cleaning. As for the cleaning liquid, use the silicon unit friendly materials. 4. When removing water drop and drying after washing, use the soft cloth to wipe. 5. To avoid residue of the products from remaining, perform washing and drying everyday.
NOTE In the clearance A, the diagram, which connects directly to the most important weight sensor of the machine. Be sure if the cleaning which does not follow the mentioned method is performed, it may cause damage like water penetration.
1. Be careful about overload since the Weigh Drive unit and the dispersion feeder unit are joined to the weight sensor. 2. Washing the part A peripheral and using the air-nozzle in drying like water drop removal may damage the diagram. Be sure not to use it. 3. As for cleaning of the part A peripheral and drying like removing water drops, do not use the tools such as brushes and sharp parts as they may damage the diagram.
9-4
9.3
Methods of Washing and Sterilizing
The Table 9-1 shows the recommendable standard method of cleaning and sterilizing the machine. Refer to "9.4Washing and Sterilizing Procedures for Each Unit and Component" for details on washing or sterilizing for each unit or component.
CAUTION
Washing and sterilizing methods vary depending on the product character, the operation process, and the status of microbial infestation. Create the washing and sterilizing manual and operate daily washing and sterilizing. For creation, refer to the Table 9-1. For further details, contact the store you purchased this machine or our customer information. The washing and sterilizing methods for unremovable units or components should be adapted to the weigher specifications (mainly the waterproof and dustproof specifications). The determination is available to check "WP" or "SS" attached on the end of the model name of your machine. For more information, consult the distributor where the weigher was purchased or your Ishida customer service representative. [Example] CCW-R-*-WP: IP65 or the equivalent CCW-R-*-SS: IP50 or the equivalent After washing and sterilizing, drain water from the units and components and dry them completely. Otherwise, it may cause the cultivation of microorganisms. If spot welding seems to cause the cultivation of microorganisms, consult the distributor where the weigher was purchased or your Ishida customer service representative.
Table 9-1 Washing and Sterilizing Methods

Unit or component
<Removable units> Inlet chute Dispersion table Radial trough Pool hopper Weigh hopper Collection chute (upper and lower) Discharge chute Timing hopper
Washing method
<Washing by immersing> Immerse the unit or component into the specified detergent (neutral detergent), then brush and rinse it.
Sterilizing method
< Sterilizing by immersing > Immerse the unit or component into hot water or bactericide, then rinse and dry it. 1) Hot water Immerse the unit or component into 80 to 90 C water. 2) Bactericide Immerse the unit or component into sodium hypochlorite (available chlorine density: 250ppm, temperature: 20 to 25 C) for approximately 20 minutes.
NOTE Use a soft brush.
9-5
Table 9-1 Washing and Sterilizing Methods (Continued)

Unit or component
<Unremovable units> WP Dispersion feeder specification Dispersion cover (IP65) Weigh/drive unit Main unit and other Remote control unit
Washing method
<Washing by brushing or wiping> 1) Brushing Brush the surface of the unit or component with a brush moistened with the specified detergent (neutral detergent), then wipe it with a cloth moistened with water. 2) Wiping Wipe the unit or component with a cloth moistened with the specified detergent (neutral detergent), then wipe it with a cloth moistened with water.
Sterilizing method
<Sterilizing by spraying or wiping> 1) Spraying Spray bactericide on the unit or component. 2) Wiping Wipe the unit or component with a cloth moistened with bactericide. *Bactericide Sodium hypochlorite (available chlorine density: 250ppm) Alcohol: 80%
NOTE Use a soft brush. Scars may cause the cultivation of microorganisms. Do not perform washing other than wiping for the remote control unit. Do not use the brush to the rubber cover of the linear feeder. The hopper hangers of the weigh/drive unit are connected to the weigh sensor. Do not apply excessive load to these hangers.
NOTE Avoid the overload since the Weigh Drive unit and the dispersion feeder unit are joined to the weight sensor. Do not perform washing other than wiping with alcohol (80%) for the remote control unit. Rinse and dry the unit or component completely after sterilizing.
9-6
Table 9-1 Washing and Sterilizing Methods (Continued)

Unit or component
<Unremovable units> PB Dispersion feeder specification Dispersion cover (IP40) Weigh/drive unit Main unit and other Remote control unit
Washing method
<Washing by wiping> 1) Wiping Wipe the unit or component with a cloth moistened with the specified detergent (neutral detergent), then wipe it with a cloth moistened with water.
Sterilizing method
<Sterilizing by wiping> 1) Wiping Wipe the unit or component with a cloth moistened with bactericide. *Bactericide Alcohol: 80%
NOTE Avoid the overload since the weigh hopper hanger part of the Weigh Drive unit is joined to the weight sensor.
NOTE Avoid the overload since the weigh hopper hanger part of the Weigh Drive unit is joined to the weight sensor. Rinse and dry the unit or component completely after sterilizing.
9-7
9.4
Washing and Sterilizing Procedures for Each Unit and Component

Removable unit cleaning
1 2 3
9.4.1
Fig. 9-3 Removable unit and part
No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Name
Feed chute Dispersion table Radial trough Pool hopper Weigh hopper Collection chute Dump chute Timing hopper
Reference
9.4.1.1 9.4.1.2 9.4.1.3 9.4.1.4 9.4.1.4 9.4.1.5 9.4.1.6 9.4.1.7
9-8
9.4.1.1
Inlet Chute
INLET CHUTE
1. Loosen the wing nuts and remove the inlet chute. 2. Wash and sterilize the inlet chute, then rinse and dry it completely. (Refer to Table 9-2 for the washing and sterilizing methods.) 3. Remount the inlet chute in the reverse order of removal. 4. Confirm that the inlet chute is securely mounted.
Fig. 9-4 Inlet Chute
Table 9-2 Method of cleaning chute washing and sterilizing

Washing Sterilizing Washing by immersing (neutral detergent) Sterilizing by immersing Hot water (80 to 90 C): 30 minutes, or Sodium hypochlorite (available chlorine density: 250ppm): 20 minutes
9.4.1.2
Dispersion Table
CAUTION
When cleaning the dispersion table, do not apply excessive pressure. Doing so may damage the sensor mechanisms.
1. Turn the dispersion table counterclockwise (to the left). 2. Wash and sterilize the dispersion table, then rinse and dry it completely. (Refer to Table 9-3 for the washing and sterilizing methods.) 3. Remount the dispersion table in the reverse order of removal. 4. Confirm that the dispersion table is securely mounted.
Fig. 9-5 Dispersion Table
NOTE Remount the dispersion table after remounting the radial troughs.
Table 9-3 Method of dispersion table washing and sterilizing

Washing Washing by immersing (neutral detergent)
9-9
Table 9-3 Method of dispersion table washing and sterilizing (Continued)

Sterilizing Sterilizing by immersing Hot water (80 to 90 C): 30 minutes, or Sodium hypochlorite (available chlorine density: 250ppm): 20 minutes
9.4.1.3
Radial Trough
NOTE Remove the radial troughs after removing the pool hoppers.
1. Pull up the clamp lever on the bottom of the radial trough to remove the radial trough. 2. Wash and sterilize the radial trough, then rinse and dry it completely. (Refer to Table 9-4 for the washing and sterilizing methods.)
Fig. 9-6 Radial Trough Removal
3. Remount the radial trough in the reverse order of removal. 4. Confirm that each radial trough does not make contact with an adjacent trough. (Refer to Fig. 9-7 .) 5. If in contact, dismount and remount the radial trough as required.
Fig. 9-7 Radial Trough Remounting
Table 9-4 Washing and sterilizing method of radial trough

9-10
9.4.1.4
Pool and Weigh Hoppers
CAUTION
When cleaning the weigh hopper, do not apply excessive pressure. Doing so may damage the sensor mechanisms.
NOTE When mounting or removing the hoppers, support the sides of hoppers while performing the work.
1. Pull the pool hopper toward front and remove it.
Fig. 9-8 Figure of Pool hopper removal
2. Pull the weigh hopper toward front and remove it. 3. Wash and sterilize each hopper, then rinse and dry it completely. (Refer to Table 9-5 for the washing and sterilizing methods.)
NOTE When the radial trough is removed, remount the radial trough first.
Fig. 9-9 Weigh Hopper Removal
4. Install in the reverse procedure of the removal. Push the hook of the hopper horizontally placing against the fixed pin of the main unit side to set. 5. Confirm that the roller of each hopper is securely inserted to the open/close lever groove. 6. If not, install again. Table 9-5 Washing and sterilizing method of pool hopper and weigh hopper
Washing Washing by immersing (neutral detergent)
9-11
Table 9-5 Washing and sterilizing method of pool hopper and weigh hopper
Sterilizing Sterilizing by immersing Hot water (80 to 90 C): 30 minutes, or Sodium hypochlorite (available chlorine density: 250ppm): 20 minutes
9.4.1.5
Collection Chutes
NOTE Remount the collection chute after remounting the discharge chute.
1. Remove the collection chute by holding the upper position and lifting it upwards. 2. Wash and sterilize each chute, then rinse and dry it completely. (Refer to Table 9-6 for the washing and sterilizing methods.) 3. Remount each chute in the reverse order of removal. 4. Confirm that the collection chute is securely mounted.
Fig. 9-10 Collection Chute Removal
Table 9-6 Washing and sterilizing method of collection chute

9-12
9.4.1.6
Discharge Chutes
NOTE Remove the discharge chute after removing the collection chute.
The method to remove the discharge chute differs depending on the model.
1. Lift the discharge chute upwards and pull it out through the legs. If it is impossible to pull it out through the legs, remove the timing hopper first, then remove the discharge chute from the bottom of the weigher. ( 9.4.1.7 Timing Hopper) 2. Wash and rinse each chute, then rinse and dry it completely. (Refer to Table 9-7 for the washing and sterilizing methods.) 3. Remount each chute in the reverse order of removal. 4. Confirm that the discharge chute is securely mounted. Table 9-7 Washing and sterilizing method of dump chute
Fig. 9-11 Discharge Chute Removal
9-13
9.4.1.7
Timing Hopper
1. Loosen the wing nut on the drive shaft and remove the timing hopper from the drive unit.
Fig. 9-12 Timing Hopper
2. Remove the timing hopper by holding the drive unit side and lifting it upwards. 3. Wash and sterilize the hopper, then rinse and dry it completely. (Refer to Table 9-8 for the washing and sterilizing methods.) 4. Remount the hopper in the reverse order of removal. 5. Confirm that the timing hopper is securely mounted.
Fig. 9-13 Timing Hopper Removal
Table 9-8 Washing and sterilizing method of timing hopper

9-14
9.4.2
Cleaning Unremovable Unit
Fig. 9-14 Unremovable unit and part
No. Name
1 2 3 4 Radial feeder Drive unit Main unit Remote control unit
Reference
9.4.2.1 9.4.2.1 9.4.2.1 9.4.2.2
9-15
9.4.2.1
Main Unit, Dispersion Unit, and Drive Unit
CAUTION
The caution about the methods of the main unit and drive unit is described in "9.2Before Washing and Sterilizing" Follow the mentioned methods for washing and sterilizing.
NOTE Do not use a brush on the rubber cover.

The dispersion feeder and the hopper hanger of the weigh/drive unit is connected to the weigh sensor. Do not apply excessive load to them.
1. Remove the units or components listed below following the procedures described in Section 9.4.1.1 to 9.4.1.7. Inlet chute Dispersion table Radial trough Pool hopper Weigh hopper Collection chute Discharge chute Timing hopper 2. Wash and sterilize each unit or component according to respective specifications, then rinse and dry it completely. (Refer to Table 9-9 and Table 9-10 for the washing and sterilizing methods.) 3. Remount the unit or component in the reverse order of removal. 4. Confirm that the unit or component is securely mounted.
DISPERSION FEEDER
MAIN UNIT
RUBBER COVER DISPERSION UNIT WEIGH HOPPER HANGER DRIVE UNIT
Fig. 9-15 Main Unit, Dispersion Unit, and Drive Unit
Table 9-9 Washing and sterilizing method of Main unit, Dispersion unit, and Drive unit (WP specification)
Washing Sterilizing Washing by brushing or wiping (neutral detergent) Sterilizing by spraying or wiping Alcohol: 80%, or Sodium hypochlorite (available chlorine density: 250ppm)
Table 9-10 Washing and sterilizing method of Main unit, Dispersion unit, and Drive unit (SS specification)
Washing Washing by wiping (neutral detergent)
9-16
Table 9-10 Washing and sterilizing method of Main unit, Dispersion unit, and Drive unit (SS specification) (Continued)
Sterilizing Sterilizing by wiping Alcohol: 80%
9.4.2.2
Remote Control Unit
CAUTION
Do not clean the operation panel of the remote control unit by rubbing it strongly or using adhesive tape. Do not clean the operation panel of the remote control unit with thinner, benzene, or other organic solvents. Do not apply detergent directly to the operation panel of the remote control unit.
1. Wash and sterilize the remote control unit, then wipe it with a cloth moistened with water. (Refer to Table 9-11 for the washing and sterilizing methods.)
Fig. 9-16 Remote Control Unit Cleaning
Table 9-11 Washing and sterilizing method of remote control unit

Washing Sterilizing Washing by wiping (neutral detergent) Sterilizing by wiping Alcohol: 80%
9-17
9-18
10.1 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 10.2 Daily Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
10.2.1 Pre-Startup Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
10.3 Periodic Inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

10.3.1 10.3.2 10.3.3 10.3.4 10.3.5 10.3.6 10.3.7 10.3.8 10.3.9 Span Check (Monthly) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Span Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 Open/Close Operation Check for the Hopper Gate (Monthly) . 10-9 Check for the Hopper Open/Close Roller (Monthly) . . . . . . . . 10-10 Amplitude Check for the Radial Feeder (Monthly) . . . . . . . . . 10-10 Crack Check (Annually) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11 Check for the Rubber Cover (Annually) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12 Replacement of Memory backup battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 Fuse replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
<MEMO>
10.1 Summary
This chapter describes the maintenance and inspection procedures which are required to keep the weigher in optimum running condition.
WARNING
In maintenance and check of the parts which are not designated specially, turn off the main power switch and lock the main power switch. The operator is required to hold the key during operation.
< Contents >

Daily and periodic inspection Adjustment of the components
< Intention >

To understand and master the maintenance and inspection procedures for each component in order to keep the weigher in optimum condition and prevent production loss
< Intended reader >

10-1
10.2 Daily Inspection

10.2.1 Pre-Startup Inspection
Before starting production, inspect the items contained in the checklist below.
WARNING
Make sure that the components are securely mounted. Otherwise, they may fall out due to vibration and result in damages to the weigher or injury to the operators.
NOTE The mounting procedures for components are described in 12.4 Installation Procedures.
Table 10-1 Pre-Startup Inspection Checklist

Condition to check
Weigher and vicinity Dispersion table attachment Dispersion table and Radial trough interference Radial trough interference
Inspection item
Check around and above the weigher for tools or other items not necessary for production. Check that the dispersion table is securely mounted without play or rocking. Check that the dispersion table is not making contact with the radial troughs. Refer to <Dispersion table>. Check that the radial troughs are not making contact with each other. Refer to <Radial trough>. Confirms that the roller of each hopper is completely inserted in the U-shape groove of the opening and closing lever. Check that the collection chutes are properly mounted. Confirms that the timing hopper and the drive unit is completely joined by the drive lever.
Hopper mounting Collection chute mounting Timing hopper mounting
10-2
< Dispersion table >

Inspect the area circled below to check for interference between the dispersion table and the radial trough. (See "Fig. 10-1 Dispersion Table Partial View.")
Table 10-2 Components of the Dispersion Table

No.
1 2 Radial trough Dispersion table
Name
< Radial trough >

Check the area circled below for interference between the radial troughs. (See "Fig. 10-2 Radial Trough Partial View.")
Table 10-3 Components of the Radial Trough

No.
1 Radial trough
Name
10-3
10.3 Periodic Inspection

Refer to "Table 10-4 Periodic Inspection List" to perform the maintenance and inspection by following the procedures described below in order to keep the weigher in optimum running condition and enhance the efficiency. Table 10-4 Periodic Inspection List
Inspection Item
Span check Open/close operation check for each hopper gate Check for the open/close roller of each hopper Amplitude check for the radial feeder Crack check Check for the rubber cover Memory backup Battery replacement Fuse replacement
Frequency
Monthly Monthly Monthly Monthly Annually Annually Approx. every 5 years As needed
Reference
Section 10.3.1 Section 10.3.3 Section 10.3.4 Section 10.3.5 Section 10.3.6 Section 10.3.7 Section 10.3.8 Section 10.3.9
10.3.1 Span Check (Monthly)
1. Press the zero adjustment key Main Menu. Zero adjustment menu appears.
on the
All hoppers are selected and the hoppers are displayed in blue.
Fig. 10-3 Main Menu
10-4
Fig. 10-4 Zero adjustment menu
The screen displays "Please wait a moment" and the zero adjustment starts.
Fig. 10-5 Zero adjustment in progress menu
Once the zero adjustment completes, the weight is displayed on each weigh hopper. 3. Confirms that the weight display of each weigh hopper key is within 0.0 0.1 g.
NOTE When the weight displays is over 0.1 g or under - 0.1 g, perform the zero adjustment again.
Pressing each hopper key on the menu can switch each hopper's selection or non selection.
Fig. 10-6 Zero adjustment complete menu
10-5
4. Put the span adjustment weight on the all weigh hoppers.
NOTE Be noted that the weight does not touch the any other place.
Normally the span adjustment wait is 200 g, however it varies depending on the specification.
Fig. 10-7 Figure of Weigh hopper
The weight is displayed on each weight head key. Confirm that the weight display of each weight head key is within 200.0 0.1 g.
NOTE When the weight displays is over 200.1 g or under 199.9 g, perform the span adjustment again. ( <Span adjustment>)
5. Remove the span adjustment weight. 6. Press the Exit key .
The previous menu appears. The span check completes.
Fig. 10-8 Zero adjustment menu
10.3.2 Span Adjustment

NOTE Span adjustment can be performed on the Site Engineer Level and the upper levels.
10-6
Span adjustment is performed by placing a standard 200.0g span adjustment weight on each weigh hopper so that the measured weight is registered in the weigh mechanism as 200.0g. When the displayed weight is not within the range of the reference weight as a result of span check, span adjustment should be performed. Follow the procedure described below to perform span adjustment. 1. Confirm that the weigh hoppers are empty. 2. Displays the Main Menu of the Site Engineer of higher levels. 3. Press the Machine Set pop-up key . The Machine Set pop-up menu appears.
Fig. 10-9 Main Menu
4. Press "Manual adjustment." The Weigher Adjustment menu appears. The weight of each weigh hopper will be displayed.
Fig. 10-10 Machine Set pop-up Menu
5. In zero adjustment of the all weigh hoppers, press the All Heads Select / Clear key. The weight head keys of all hoppers are displayed in blue.
TIP
To adjust the specific weigh hoppers, press the keys of the weigh hoppers to be adjusted.
10-7
6. Press the zero adjustment key Zero adjustment starts.
The zero-adjusted weight head key is displayed in the normal mode and the weight is displayed. 7. Confirms that the weight display is within 0.0 0.1 g. Zero adjustment completes.
Fig. 10-12 Weigher adjustment menu
NOTE Make sure noted that the span adjustment weight does not touch the any other place.
8. Put the span adjustment weight (normally 200 g / pcs) on the weight hopper for span adjustment. 9. When performing span adjustment of all weight hoppers, press the All Heads Select / Clear key . All hoppers'weight head keys are displayed in red.
Fig. 10-13 Weight hopper
TIP
Press the weigh head key for span arrangement when performing span adjustment of the designated weight hopper.
Fig. 10-14 Weigher Adjustment menu
10. Press the WH span adjustment key Span adjustment starts.
The span-adjusted weight head key is displayed in the normal mode and the weight is displayed. 11. When the weight displays is over 200.1 g or under 199.9 g, perform the span adjustment again following the procedure 10 to 12.
10-8
12. Remove the span adjustment weight from the weigh hopper when the displayed weight is within 200.0 0.1 g. 13. Perform the zero adjustment (procedure 5 to 7). 14. Press the return key. The main menu appears. The span adjustment completes.
10.3.3 Open/Close Operation Check for the Hopper Gate (Monthly)

1. Remove the pool hopper and the weigh hopper.
Fig. 10-16 Pool Hopper Removal
Fig. 10-17 Weigh Hopper Removal
10-9
2. Push and pull the open / close roller of each hopper to check if each gate opens and closes smoothly. 3. When each gate does not open / close smoothly, check if the hopper has any stagger. 4. Check the wear state of the bush used at the supporting point of each gate. Replace it if any wear is found.
OPEN/CLOSE LEVER OPEN/CLOSE ROLLER
Fig. 10-18 Pool hopper open / close roller and lever
OPEN/CLOSE ROLLER OPEN/CLOSE LEVER
Fig. 10-19 Weigh hopper open / close roller and lever
10.3.4 Check for the Hopper Open/Close Roller (Monthly)

1. Turn the open / close roller of each hopper manually and check if it turns smoothly. (Refer to the figure in previous section.) 2. If not, check the following points: Check if the roller has lopsided wear. Check if the open / close roller is dirty. 3. Replace the open / close roller when the roller does not turn smoothly even after cleaning or it has lopsided wear.
10.3.5 Amplitude Check for the Radial Feeder (Monthly)

NOTE If product cannot be normally conveyed on the radial trough, there is a possibility of cracks in the radial troughs or its attachment portion. Check whether there are any cracks in these components.
When a different amplitude is set for each feeder, take that into account while performing an amplitude check.
1. Set the feeder time to the same value for all heads by feeder adjustment.
10-10
2. Start production, then check for the conveyance condition of products on the radial troughs. The feeder needs to be adjusted especially when the feed speed is slow. Consult the distributor where the weigher was purchased or your Ishida customer service representative.
10.3.6 Crack Check (Annually)

Check if any crack of pool hopper, weigh hopper, and radial trough are found. Replace the pool hopper, the weigh hopper, and the radial trough if they have any crack. As for the place where the crack is often found, check the places circled shown in "Fig. 10-20 Places Where Cracks Often Occur."
Fig. 10-20 Places Where Cracks Often Occur
10-11
10.3.7 Check for the Rubber Cover (Annually)

Check if the rubber cover of the radial trough has any wear, change of shape, or crack. The rubber covers with abrasions, distortions, or cracks need to be replaced. Contact the distributor where the weigher was purchased or your Ishida customer service representative.
2 3 5 4 6
Fig. 10-21 Dispersion Feeder Cover
Table 10-5 Dispersion Feeder Cover

No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 Main unit Dispersion feeder Rubber cover WH hanger Dispersion unit Drive unit
Name
10-12
10.3.8 Replacement of Memory backup battery

This equipment uses the primary battery as the backup battery to record the preset details and so on. When the battery voltage decreases due to battery life, the data such as the preset details disappears. Although this equipment has a battery voltage check function, preset details could have already disappeared by the time when the voltage reduction is detected. If you want to protect the preset details by replacing the battery before the battery voltage reduction due to battery life being detected, we recommend to contact our customer desk regularly for battery replacement. Normal frequency of battery replacement is once in five years; however, this is only an indication and the battery could die within five years depending on the operating environment.
WARNING
Contact our customer desk for replacement of the memory backup battery. Our service department is in charge of replacement.
10-13
10.3.9 Fuse replacement

The following fuses are used for the equipment. In blown of the fuse, check the source and replace with the relevant battery. 5 20 5 20
DANGER
250V 250V
5A 3.15A
Only qualified persons are allowed to operate.
WARNING
Ensure to turn off the main power before starting operation. Start operation 3 minutes after turning off the power.
Follow the procedure below to replace the fuse. Fuses are used for the AC fuse board (P - 5507 *) and the DC fuse board (P - 5508 *). For the details of each board, refer to the appendix. Use the tester for communication check. 1. Remove the cover of the fuse board. 2. Turn the fuse holder to the left to remove the blown fuse. 3. Install the new fuse. 4. Install the fuse holder.
NOTE Turn on the switch at this stage. If the LED of the fuse is off, it is normal. The blinking LED indicates that the fuse is blown.
5. Install the cover. Fuse replacement completes.
10-14
11 TROUBLESHOOTING
11.1 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 11.2 Error Display Handling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
11.2.1 11.2.2 11.2.3 11.2.4 11.2.5 11.2.6 11.2.7 11.2.8 11.2.9 Pattern 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5 Pattern 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9 Pattern 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11 Pattern 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13 Pattern 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14 Pattern 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14 Pattern 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15 Pattern 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15 Error Clear and Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
11.3 Weigher Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17 11.4 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-20 11.5 Handling Drive unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-24
<MEMO>
11 TROUBLESHOOTING
11 TROUBLESHOOTING
11.1 Summary
This chapter describes how to determine the causes of malfunctions and restore the weigher to proper functioning status. When the weigher malfunctions and an error message appears on the remote control unit, refer to "11.2 Error Display Handling." If the weigher malfunctions but no error message appears, refer to "11.3 Weigher Malfunction." Refer to "11.4 Troubleshooting" for more technical solutions. If the action for your trouble is not described in this chapter or the suggested actions are ineffective, please contact the distributor where the weigher was purchased or your Ishida customer service representative.
DANGER
Maintenance of the control boards and inside of the operation board should be performed by maintenance electricians. When performing work with the main body cover open, do not touch any charged electrical components.
WARNING
In maintenance and check of the parts which are not designated specially, turn off the main power switch and lock the main power switch. The operator is required to hold the key during operation. ( 1.6 Drive Power Shutdown and Indication) Even after turning off the main power switch, power is always supplied to the PS-0 unit and XT601 terminal. Be careful especially in bringing tools closer. When performing maintenance or inspection work, clearly indicate this situation by posting a sign in the work area. Maintenance of the main unit should be performed over 5 minutes after turning off the main power switch. When performing maintenance and inspection work on the upper part of the weigher, use a sturdy ladder or foothold to avoid a hazardous fall.
< Contents >

Error messages and corrective action Errors, causes, and actions
11-1
11 TROUBLESHOOTING
< Intention >

To understand and master the actions for errors which occur during production in order to enhance efficiency
< Intended reader >

System managers Maintenance personnel
11-2
11 TROUBLESHOOTING
11.2 Error Display Handling

If an error occurs during production, drain, or zero adjustment, an error message will appear on the screen of the remote control unit. Error messages have eight menu patterns depending on the display method, the alarm sound, and the equipment status. (See "Table 11-1Error Display Patterns.") Actions to be taken vary with error display pattern. Therefore, confirm the display pattern of the present error, then refer to details on each pattern described in "11.2.1Pattern 1" to "11.2.8Pattern 8" to reset the error display and restore the weigher to proper functioning status. Table 11-1 Error Display Patterns
Error display patterns
Pattern 1
Error
ZERO ERROR (auto zero adjustment) SPAN ERROR WH, PH, TS, TH, and DTH ERROR OVERSCALE OVERWEIGHT ERROR PIECE WEIGHT ERROR (piece weighing specification) ZERO ERROR (manual zero adjustment) DUC ERROR RECHECK ERROR (piece weighing specification) NO TRANSMISSION. NO RESPONSE LOW PRODUCT. WARNING: OVERSCALE WARNING: DETACHED HEAD WARNING: OVERWEIGHT ERROR Fan stops. Please contact our service person. The preset data of <PRODUCT SET> may have been corrupt. The preset data of <WEIGH SPEC. SET> may have been corrupt. The preset data of <COMBI.CALC.SPEC.SET> may have been corrupt. The preset data of <SECTION SETTING> may have been corrupt. The preset data of <INFEEDER CONTROL SET> may have been corrupt. The preset data of <PACKER INTERLOCK SET> may have been corrupt. The preset data of <PRODUCT SET> IN MEMORY CARD may have been corrupt. The preset data of <WEIGH SPEC. SET> IN MEMORY CARD may have been corrupt. The preset data of <COMBI.CALC.SPEC.SET> IN MEMORY CARD may have been corrupt. The preset data of <SECTION SETTING> IN MEMORY CARD may have been corrupt. The preset data of <INFEEDER CONTROL SET> IN MEMORY \nCARD may have been corrupt. The preset data of <PACKER INTERLOCK SET> IN MEMORY CARD may have been corrupt.
Weigher status
Alarm buzzer sounds. Production stops. Section 11.2.1
Pattern 2
Alarm buzzer sounds. Production stops. Section 11.2.2 Alarm buzzer sounds. Section 11.2.3
Pattern 3
Pattern 4
Warning bell sounds. Production is suspended. Section 11.2.4 These errors will be displayed only during production pause.
11-3
11 TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 11-1 Error Display Patterns (Continued)

Error display patterns
Pattern 5
Error
AFV ZERO ERROR AFV PARAMETER ERROR AFV COMPENSATION ERROR AFV OUTPUT ERROR TOTAL OVERFLOW
Weigher status
Alarm buzzer sounds. Production stops. Power is turned off. Section 11.2.5 Alarm buzzer sounds. Production stops. Section 11.2.6
Pattern 6
Pattern 7
ADC firmware error
Production stops. Power is turned off. Section 11.2.7 Alarm buzzer sounds. Section 11.2.8
Pattern 8
File transfer error.
11-4
11 TROUBLESHOOTING
11.2.1 Pattern 1
When an error occurs during producction, draining and zero adjustment, warning buzzer alarms and the equipment stops automatically. At this time, the following items are displayed on the remote control unit menu; the error name, the error place, the error phenomenon and result, the error source, and the countermeasure. When a pattern 1 error occurs, refer to "11.2.9Error Clear and Handling" to remove the cause of the error and clear the error. Table 11-2 Error Displays (Pattern 1)
Name/ description
ZERO ERROR 1. 2.
Cause
Product is remaining in weigh hopper. Product is spilling from pool hopper.
Action
After checking the following points, please perform manual zero adjustment. 1. Remove the products remaining in the weigh hoppers. 2. Check if there are any loosen, broken, or fallen screws in the weigh hoppers. If it is impossible to perform repair work, contact the distributor where the weigher was purchased or your Ishida customer service representative to request a repair work. 3. If the proper functioning status cannot be restored through actions 1 and 2 above, there is a possibility of malfunction in the ADC board or power supply. In this case, contact the distributor where the weigher was purchased or your Ishida customer service representative to request a repair work. Table 11-11
TIP
This error occurs when zero adjustment exceeds the allowable range due to the above causes.
SPAN ERROR
1.
Span adjustment weight is not ***g.
TIP
This error occurs when the span adjustment exceeds the adjustable range due to an improper span adjustment weight.
After checking the following points, please perform span adjustment. 1. Place a proper span adjustment weight. Standard capacity specification: 200.0g 2. If the proper functioning status cannot be restored through action 1 above, there is a possibility of malfunction in the ADC board or power supply. In this case, contact the distributor where the weigher was purchased or your Ishida customer service representative to request a repair work. Table 11-11
11-5
11 TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 11-2 Error Displays (Pattern 1) (Continued)

Name/ description
OVERWEIGHT ERROR /Proper combination was not obtained. 1. 2. 3.
Cause
Excessive product fed into weigh hopper. 1. Too many feed volume to the charge hopper or the dispersion feeder. The set value of the upper weight limit is small. 2.
Action
If one to three heads are selected during combination weighing, the amount of supplied product is excessive. In this case, decrease the feeder amplitude or the feeder time. In order to prevent an excessive supply of products, decrease the amount of product supplied from the infeed conveyor, lower the position of the infeed control phototube, or decrease the DF weight of the load cell. When the product with the large piece weight, enlarge the upper weight limit.
TIP
This error occurs when a proper combination weight cannot be obtained and all weights are underweight or overweight, or when overscale due to vibration repeats more than the set count. If overscale is set to be automatically discharged, production will not stop due to this error, and a warning message will be displayed on the lower part of the remote control unit.
3.
11-6
11 TROUBLESHOOTING

Name/ description
Overscale error 1. / The weighed products over 2. "the target weight value + the upper weight limit" are 3. conveyed to the hopper that the error occurred.
Cause
Excessive product fed into weigh hopper. 1. The products supplied from the infeeder are 2. not dispersed uniformly. Position of the infeed control phototube is not proper. 3.
Action
Decrease the feeder amp/time. Adjust the location of the feeder so that the feeding part comes to the center of the charge hopper. Lower the photoelectric tube for feed control as the too many products are pooled in the charge hopper due to the high place. Table 11-11
TIP
This error occurs when the weighed product which is over "the target weight value + the upper weight limit" or "the target count value + the upper count limit" is conveyed to one head and becomes more than set heads. If an overscale occurs during production, an overscale error occurs, even if the number of overscale heads is less than the set head count. Overscale error also occurs during production pause due to full-scale head. (The products that exceed the weighing capacity are supplied to that head.) If overscale is set to be automatically discharged, production will not stop due to this error, and a warning message will be displayed on the lower part of the remote control unit. For full-scale head not discharged during production, an overscale error occurs during production pause.
**ERROR 1. /STEPPING MOTOR DRIVE ERROR Hopper does not open/close properly. (**:PH, WH, TS, TH, or DTH)
Product is caught in the hopper gates.
1. 2.
TIP
This error occurs when the products are caught in the hopper gates or the hopper motor malfunctions due to excessive load and result in the hopper malfunction.
3.
Remove the products caught in the hoppers. Check if there are any loosen, broken, or fallen screws in the weigh hoppers. If it is impossible to perform repair work, contact the distributor where the weigher was purchased or your Ishida customer service representative to request a repair work. If still this error occurs after error clear, readjust the hopper timing. If this error occurs after hopper timing readjust, turn off the main power switch and on again. Table 11-11
11-7
11 TROUBLESHOOTING

Name/ description
**ERROR 1. /POWER ERROR There is no power to the motor. (**PH, WH, TS, TH, or DTH) Fuse is blown.
Cause
1.
Action
Replace the fuse.
TIP
This error occurs when the power is not supplied to the drive unit.
**ERROR /DRIVE PATTERN CALC ERROR (**:PH, WH, TS, TH, or DTH) **ERROR /DRIVE PARAMETER NON-RECEPTION ERROR (**:PH, WH, TS, TH, or DTH)
1.
Setting of the hopper open/close characteristics is not proper.
1.
Initialize hopper drive.
1.
2.
The communication is interfered by 1. momentary power loss of the power supply. (There is a failure in the communication line inside the weigher.) The drive unit is requested to drive before it received the drive parameters from the remote control unit. 1.
Turn off the main power switch and on again.
**ERROR Hopper opening and closing are overlapped. /CYCLE OVERLAP ERROR TIP (**:PH, WH, TS, TH, or DTH) This error occurs when the drive unit of TH, DTH, or TS attempts to drive in the next cycle.
Weigher speed setting is too high. Decrease the weigher speed.
PIECE WEIGHT ERROR /Please check current piece weight.
1.
The revised piece weight is not within the piece weight revision range.
1.
Weigher speed setting is too high. Decrease the weigher speed.
TIP
This error occurs when an optional function (piece weighing) is used.
11-8
11 TROUBLESHOOTING
11.2.2 Pattern 2
When an error occurs during production, draining and zero adjustment, warning buzzer alarms and the equipment stops automatically. At this time, the following items are displayed on the remote control unit menu; the error name, the error place, the error phenomenon and result, the error source, and the countermeasure. When a pattern 2 error occurs, refer to "11.2.9Error Clear and Handling" to remove the cause of the error and clear the error. Table 11-3 Error Displays (Pattern 2)
Name/ description
ZERO ERROR 1. 2.
Cause
Action
Product is remaining in weigh After checking the following points, please hopper. perform manual zero adjustment. Product is spilling from pool hopper. 1. Remove the products remaining in the weigh hoppers. TIP 2. Adjust the open/close timing of the hoppers. Or check if there are any loosen, broken, or This error occurs when zero fallen screws in the weigh hoppers. If it is adjustment exceeds the impossible to perform repair work, contact allowable range due to the the distributor where the weigher was above causes. purchased or your Ishida customer service This error also occurs when representative to request a repair work. too heavy hoppers are 3. If the proper functioning status cannot be mounted or excessive load restored through actions 1 and 2 above, there is applied to the cell in the is a possibility of malfunction in the ADC plus or minus direction. board or power supply. In this case, contact the distributor where the weigher was purchased or your Ishida customer service representative to request a repair work. Error has occurred in communication. 1. There is a possibility that the CPU or board is damaged. Contact the distributor where the weigher was purchased or your Ishida customer service representative to request a repair work.
DUC ERROR /WCU-DUC CIRCUIT DISCONNECT ERROR
1.
TIP
This error occurs when the weigher is affected by external noise.
DUC ERROR /DUC NODE SETTING ERROR
1.
Error has occurred in communication.
1.
TIP
This error occurs when the CPU or board is damaged.
Contact the distributor where the weigher was purchased or your Ishida customer service representative to request a repair work.
11-9
11 TROUBLESHOOTING

Name/ description
Recheck error 1.
Cause
Action
The result of the combination by Review the set value of the upper weight limit and count is not within "the target weight the lower limit. limit ? the lower weight limit" and "the target weight limit + the upper weight limit."
TIP
This error occurs when an optional function (piece weighing) is used.
11-10
11 TROUBLESHOOTING
11.2.3 Pattern 3
When an error occurs during production, draining and zero adjustment, warning buzzer alarms and the error name appears. When a pattern 3 error occurs, refer to "Table 11-4Error Displays (Pattern 3)" to remove the cause of the error and take necessary action. When the action is completed, the name of the error will disappear. Table 11-4 Error Displays (Pattern 3)
Name/ description
NO TRANSMISSION. 1.
Cause
Poor connection in the 1. communication cable between the remote control unit and the main unit (Data was unable to be transmitted 2. from the remote control unit to the main unit.)
Action
Check if the the communication cable between the remote control unit and the main unit is properly connected. There is a possibility that the ADC, FDC, or WCU board is damaged. Contact the distributor where the weigher was purchased or your Ishida customer service representative to request a repair work. Table 11-11 Check if the the communication cable between the remote control unit and the main unit is properly connected. There is a possibility that the WCU board is damaged. Contact the distributor where the weigher was purchased or your Ishida customer service representative to request a repair work. Feed products in the charge hopper. If you want to continue production with low products, set the infeed control key to "OFF." Decrease the feeder amplitude or time by feeder adjustment. Decrease the feed volume to the charge hopper. (Decrease the DF weight.)
NO RESPONSE
1.
2. Low product 1.
Poor connection in the 1. communication cable between the remote control unit and the main unit (The remote control unit was unable 2. to receive the communication data transmitted from the main unit every second for more than 5 seconds.) The power is not supplied to the WCU. The product counts in the charge hopper are few. 1. 2.
Overscale occurrence
1.
Occurs when the weighed product 1. which is over "the target weight value + the upper weight limit" or "the 2. target count value + the upper count limit" is conveyed to one head. A warning message will be displayed only when the overscale head count is less than the set head count or the head count is set to "0." 1. A weigh hopper is detached. Zero adjustment was performed with 2. a product adhering to the weigh hopper, and after that the product came out of the weigh hopper.
WARNING: C1 DETACH HEAD
1. 2.
Check if the weigh hoppers are properly mounted. Check if there is product adhering to the weigh hopper before performing zero adjustment.
11-11
11 TROUBLESHOOTING

Name/ description
WARNING: C1 OVERWEIGHT ERROR 1.
Cause
A proper combination weight cannot 1. be obtained and all combination weights are underweight or 2. overweight, or when overscale due to vibration repeats more than the set 3. count. Overscale occurs during rechecking due to an external cause such as vibration.
Action
Decrease the feeder amplitude or time by feeder adjustment. Decrease the feed volume to the charge hopper. Increase the set value of the upper weight limit.
2.
TIP
This error occurs when the overscale discharge count is less than the set count or the count is set to "0."
Fan stops. Please contact our service person.
1. 2.
The RCU fan connector is disconnected. The RCU fan is broken.
1.
Turn off the main power to avoid damaging the boards. Ask the store you purchased this machine or our customer information for maintenance.
11-12
11 TROUBLESHOOTING
11.2.4 Pattern 4
When an error occurs in a data in opening the data from the memory of the memory card, the warning bell sounds and the error display appears. At this time, the error menu appears on the remote control unit menu. When a pattern 4 error occurs, press the EXIT key to clear the error display and refer to "Table 11-5Error Displays (Pattern 4)" to take necessary action. Table 11-5 Error Displays (Pattern 4)
Name/ description
The preset data of 1. <PRODUCT SET> may have been corrupt. The preset data of <WEIGH SPEC. SET> may have been corrupt. The preset data of <COMBI.CALC.SPEC.SET > may have been corrupt. 1.
Cause
The internal data is damaged. 1.
Action
Execute memory initialization.
The internal data is damaged.
1.
1.
1.
The preset data of 1. <SECTION SETTING> may have been corrupt. The preset data of 1. <INFEEDER CONTROL SET> may have been corrupt. The preset data of <PACKER 1. INTERLOCK SET> may have been corrupt. The preset data of <PRODUCT SET> IN MEMORY CARD may have been corrupt. The preset data of <WEIGH SPEC. SET> IN MEMORY CARD may have been corrupt. The preset data of <COMBI.CALC.SPEC.SET > IN MEMORY CARD may have been corrupt. The preset data of <SECTION SETTING> IN MEMORY CARD may have been corrupt. The preset data of <INFEEDER CONTROL SET> IN MEMORY CARD may have been corrupt. 1.
1.
1.
1.
The memory card data is damaged.
1.
Execute card initialization.
1.
1.
1.
1.
1.
1.
1.
1.
11-13
11 TROUBLESHOOTING

Name/ description
The preset data of <PACKER 1. INTERLOCK SET> IN MEMORY CARD may have been corrupt.
Cause
The memory card data is damaged. 1.
Action
11.2.5 Pattern 5
When an error occurs during production, draining and zero adjustment, warning buzzer alarms and the equipment stops automatically. At this time, the error menu appears on the remote control unit menu. Refer to "Table 11-6Error Displays (Pattern 5)" for details on the errors displayed on the pattern 5 display. When a pattern 5 error occurs, press the EXIT key to clear the error display and refer to "Table 11-6Error Displays (Pattern 5)" to take necessary action. Table 11-6 Error Displays (Pattern 5)
Name/ description
AFV ZERO ERROR 1.
Cause
When performing zero adjustment manually or for the AFV cell, zero cannot be obtained. The weighing parameter is not proper. 1.
Action
Perform manual zero adjustment.
AFV PARAMETER ERROR 1. AFV COMPENSATION ERROR 1.
1.
Check the WEIGH SPEC SET menu settings. Contact the distributor where the weigher was purchased or your Ishida customer service representative to request a repair work. Contact the distributor where the weigher was purchased or your Ishida customer service representative to request a repair work.
AFV compensation does not operate 1. normally.
AFV OUTPUT ERROR
1. 2. 3.
Poor connection in the connectors 1. Contact with the spacers Improper sensitivity of the AFV cell
11.2.6 Pattern 6
When an error occurs during production, warning buzzer alarms and the equipment stops automatically. At this time, the error menu appears on the remote control unit menu. When a pattern 6 error occurs, press the EXIT key to clear the error display and refer to "Table 11-7Error Displays (Pattern 6)" to take necessary action.
11-14
11 TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 11-7 Error Displays (Pattern 6)

Name/ description
TOTAL OVERFLOW 1.
Cause
There is no area for total data. 1.
Action
Perform clear all totals or change "TOTAL OVERFLOW TEMP. MEASURE" to continue the production.
11.2.7 Pattern 7
When an error occurs during production, draining and zero adjustment, warning buzzer alarms and the power switch is turned off automatically. At this time, the error menu appears on the remote control unit menu. When a pattern 7 error occurs, turn off the main power switch and on again. If the proper function cannot be restored, contact the distributor where the weigher was purchased or your Ishida customer service representative to request a repair work. Table 11-8 Error Displays (Pattern 7)
Name/ description
ADC firmware error 1.
Cause
System error 1.
Action
Contact the distributor where the weigher was purchased or your Ishida customer service representative to request a repair work.
11.2.8 Pattern 8
In case when file transfer error occurred, the alarm buzzer goes off. At this time, the error menu appears on the remote control unit menu. When pattern 8 error occurs, refer to"Table 11-9 Error Displays (Pattern 8)"for necessary action to be taken. Table 11-9 Error Displays (Pattern 8)
Name/ description
File transfer error. 1. 2.
Cause
The ftp server is down. The network is disconnected. 1.
Action
Consult the network administrator.
11.2.9 Error Clear and Handling

When an error occurs, follow the procedure described below to clear the error display and remove the cause of the error. The keys displayed on the pattern 1 and 2 error displays, power, "ERR CLEAR & STOP", and "ERR CLEAR & RESTART" are described here. The following three methods to use these keys to clear the pattern 1 and 2 errors.
11-15
11 TROUBLESHOOTING
Error clear and handling

< Error clear using the ERR CLEAR > Method to restart production after removing the cause. < Error clear using the ERR CLEAR & STOP key > Methods to stop production after removing the cause. < Error clear using the power key > This method forcibly clears an error when the cause is unknown or cannot be removed and performing the error clear operation only results in the repetition of the error.
11-16
11 TROUBLESHOOTING
11.3 Weigher Malfunction

When the weigher malfunctions but no error display appears, follow the actions listed in "Table 1110Weigher Malfunctions." Table 11-10 Weigher Malfunctions
Status
The main power breaker shuts down.
Cause
Leakage with the weigher Short circuit in the electrical circuit of the weigher An object or product is caught in the pool, weigh, or timing hopper. The main switch is not turned on. The main power switch is turned off.
Action
Ask the store you asked this machine or us for maintenance. Table 11-12 Remove the caught object or product.
The products are discharged at times other than the discharging timing. Nothing is displayed on the screen of the remote control unit.
Turn on the main switch. (The equipment at your location) Turn on the breaker. (PS-0 unit) Turn on the circuit protector of the PS-0 unit.
Short circuit or contact failure
Ask the store you asked this machine or us for maintenance. Table 11-12
Chattering when turning on the power Display malfunction
Turn off the main power switch and turn it on again.
The weigher does not operate even RCU board malfunction if the power key on the remote control unit is set to ON.
Ask the store you asked this machine or us for maintenance. Table 11-12 Start the production of the packer. Check if the interlock signal cable is broken. (Is the interlock signal DC24V input to the terminal block for external connection?) Table 11-12
The interlock signal is not input. Interlock between the relay units LED for switch monitor does not flash (abnormal).
The interlock signal is not input. Interlock between the relay units LED for switch monitor flashes (normal).
FDC board malfunction Ask the store you asked this machine or us for The sand glass continues to be flipped maintenance. and the power key cannot be set to ON. Table 11-12
11-17
11 TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 11-10 Weigher Malfunctions (Continued)

Status
Underweight occurs frequently.
Cause
The amount of product supplied to each hopper is low.
Action
When six to nine heads are selected for one combination weight, the amount of supplied product is too low. In this case, increase the feeder amplitude or time. Increase the feed volume of the feed conveyor so that product feed does not break, and heighten the place of the photoelectric tube for feed control. Reinforce the platform. Increase the compensation value. The set speed is too high for the type and volume of product. Decrease the speed. Clean the chute and the hopper. Adjust the hopper open/close characteristic (PH, WH). Remove the object in contact. Adjust the timing. Check the hopper timing with the remote control unit.
The amount of product supplied to the dispersion unit is low.
Affected by vibration The speed is too high. There is a wide differential between The products are spilling from the the measured weights and the hopper. displayed ones. The weigh hoppers are in contact with an object.
A product is adhering to the chute or the hopper. Improper interlock timing with the packer The products pass through the hopper.
The setting of the machine No. Ask the store you asked this machine or us for specifying switch on the DUC board is maintenance. incorrect. Table 11-12 The feeder does not operate. Fuse is blown. Ask the store you asked this machine or us for maintenance. Table 11-12 Ask the store you asked this machine or us for maintenance. Table 11-12
Board malfunction
The KM01 (electromagnetic contactor) Ask the store you asked this machine or us for does not operate. maintenance. Table 11-12 A part or all of the display flashes or disappears. LCD unit malfunction Ask the store you asked this machine or us for maintenance. Table 11-12 The display is blank. LCD unit malfunction Ask the store you asked this machine or us for maintenance. Table 11-12 LCD power malfunction Ask the store you asked this machine or us for maintenance. Table 11-12 Ask the store you asked this machine or us for maintenance. Table 11-12
Malfunction of RCU power
11-18
11 TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 11-10 Weigher Malfunctions (Continued)

Status
The content of the data memory vanishes or changes.
Cause
Battery charge failure RCU board malfunction
Action
Charge the battery. Ask the store you asked this machine or us for maintenance. Table 11-12 Ask the store you asked this machine or us for maintenance. Table 11-12 Prevent the weigher from being directly blown by wind. (It is recommended to perform zero adjustment for all heads and leave the displays as it is in order to check the affect from the wind.) Reinforce the platform.
Malfunction of DMU board
The displayed weight data is not stable.
Affected by wind
Affected by vibration Load cell malfunction
Ask the store you asked this machine or us for maintenance. Table 11-12 Ask the store you asked this machine or us for maintenance. Table 11-12 Ask the store you asked this machine or us for maintenance. Table 11-12
Malfunction of Pre AMP board
ADC board malfunction
The displayed weight data is the ADC board malfunction maximum or minimum value of the range. Unintelligible letters are printed on RCU board malfunction the data sheet, or the data sheet cannot be printed. DMU board malfunction
Ask the store you asked this machine or us for maintenance. Table 11-12 Ask the store you asked this machine or us for maintenance. Table 11-12 Ask the store you asked this machine or us for maintenance. Table 11-12 Ask the store you asked this machine or us for maintenance. Table 11-12 Ask the store you asked this machine or us for maintenance. Table 11-12
Printer control board malfunction
Printer malfunction
Reading from or writing to the RCU board malfunction memory card cannot be performed.
Memory card malfunction
Replace the memory card.
11-19
11 TROUBLESHOOTING
11.4 Troubleshooting
This section describes procedures for maintenance personnel or Ishida service representatives when an error or a malfunction occurs.
< Troubles with error display >

Table 11-11 Errors and Malfunctions
Status
NO TRANSMISSION. (error display)
Cause
Short circuit or contact failure in the connectors
Action
Check the continuity of the following connectors: J350 (ADC board P-5576*) XT601 (PS-0 unit) XJ455 (relay board P-5506*) XJ453 (relay board P-5506*) XJ384 (DMU board P-5562 *) XJ384 (DMU board P-5562 *) Replace the ADC board (P-5576*). (Zero was unable to be obtained when J320 to J322 are disconnected.) Replace the preamp board (P-5527*). Replace the load cell. Check the ADC board (P-5576*) J324 connectors. Replace the PS-CAL unit. Replace the ADC board (P-5576*). Repair the weigh/drive unit. Replace the cam sensor board (P5207*). Replace DUC board (P-5579 * / P5524 *). Check the continuity of the DUC board (P-5579*/P-5524*) connectors. Replace the mini fuses on the DC fuse boards (P-5508*) and (PS-0 unit). 125V 5A Repair or replace the weigh/drive unit.
NO RESPONSE (error display) ZERO ERROR (error display)
Short circuit or contact failure in the connectors Board malfunction
Weigh mechanism malfunction 15V power malfunction SPAN ERROR (error display) Hopper error (PH or WH) (error display) Board malfunction
There is a loosen screw on the cam sensor inside the weigh/drive unit. Board malfunction Short circuit or contact failure in the connectors Fuse in the main unit is blown. (PS-0 unit)
Weigh/drive unit malfunction
11-20
11 TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 11-11 Errors and Malfunctions (Continued)

Status
Hopper error (TS, TH, or DTH) (error display)
Cause
There is a loosen screw on the cam sensor inside the weigh/drive unit. Board malfunction Short circuit or contact failure in the connectors
Action
Repair the weigh/drive unit. Replace the cam sensor board (P5207*). Replace DUC board (P-5579 * / P5524 *). Check the conduction of the connector unit of DUC board (P5579 * / P-5524 *). Check the WCU board (P-5561*) connectors. Replace the mini fuses on the DC fuse boards (P-5508*) and (PS-0 unit). 125V 5A Repair or replace the weigh/drive unit. Replace the photoelectric tube to avoid pooling of the products caused by impossibility of control of feed volume to the feeder unit.
Fuse in the main unit is blown. (PS-0 unit)
Weigh/drive unit malfunction OVERSCALE ERROR Infeed control phototube malfunction
11-21
11 TROUBLESHOOTING
< Troubles without error display >

Table 11-12 Errors and Malfunctions
Status
The main power breaker shuts down.
Cause
Leakage with the weigher Short circuit in the electrical circuit of the weigher
Action
Check leakage and short circuit.
Nothing is displayed on the screen of Open circuit or contact failure the remote control unit.
XC 21 connector (PS-RCU unit) XJ01 connector (remote control unit) Check open circuit and contact failure. Replacement of the switching power (PS-RCU unit U01) Replace the RCU board (P-970*). Replace the LCD. Replace the RCU board (P-970*). Replace the KM01 (electromagnetic contactor). (PS-0 unit) AD fuse board (P-5507 *) Replace the fuse f 601 to f 604 Standard machine mini fuse (250V 3.15A) (PS - 0 unit) Replace the relay board (P-5506*).
Display malfunction
The weigher does not operate even if RCU board malfunction the power is turned on with the remote Component malfunction control unit.
Fuse blowout
The interlock signal is not input. Interlock between the relay units LED for switch monitor does not flash (abnormal).
The interlock signal is not input. Interlock between the relay units LED for switch monitor flashes (normal). FDC board malfunction The power key cannot be turned on. There is a wide differential between the measured weights and the displayed ones. The feeder does not operate.
Replace the relay board (P-5506*). Check the connection between the relay board (P-5506*) XJ454 and the WCU board (P-5561*) J305. Replace the FDC board (P-5532*). Confirm on the test drive and set correctly by SW1 on the DUC board (P-5579 * / P-5524 *) (DUC unit). Replace the fuse of the AC fuse board (P-5507 *) F 601 to F 604. Standard machine mini fuse (250 V 3.15 A) (PS-0 unit) Replace the FDRV board (P-5578 *) and the WCU board (P-5532 *) (Electrical unit main) Check the relay board (P-5506*), WCU board (P-5561*), and harness. Replace the LCD unit.
The setting of the machine No. specifying switch on the DUC board is incorrect. Fuse is blown.
Board malfunction
The KM01 (electromagnetic contactor) does not operate. A part or all of the display flashes or disappears. LCD unit malfunction
11-22
11 TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 11-12 Errors and Malfunctions (Continued)

Status
The display is blank.
Cause
LCD unit malfunction LCD power malfunction Malfunction of RCU power
Action
Replace the LCD unit. Replace the power for LCD. Replace the power of PS-RSU unit U01. Replace the battery. (RCU board P-970*) (remote control unit) Replace the battery. DMU board (P-5562 *) (CAL unit) Replace the RCU board (P-970*). (remote control unit) Replace DMU board (P-5562 *) (CAL unit) Replace the weigh/drive unit. Replace PreAMP board (P-5527 *) (Weigh Drive unit) Replace the ADC board (P-5576*). (CAL unit) Replace the ADC board (P-5576*) (CAL unit) Replace the RCU board (P-970*). (remote control unit) Replace DMU board (P-5562 *) (CAL unit) Replace the printer control board. (remote control unit) Replace the printer. (remote control unit) Reading from or writing to the memory card cannot be performed. Replace the RCU board (P-970*). (remote control unit) Replace the memory card.
The content of the data memory vanishes or changes.
Reduced battery voltage
RCU board malfunction Malfunction of DMU board The displayed weight data is not stable. Load cell malfunction Malfunction of PreAMP board ADC board malfunction The displayed weight data is the maximum or minimum value of the range. ADC board malfunction
Unintelligible letters are printed on RCU board malfunction the data sheet, or the data sheet cannot be printed. Malfunction of DMU board Printer control board malfunction Printer malfunction
Reading from or writing to the memory card cannot be performed.
RCU board malfunction Malfunction of the memory card.
11-23
11 TROUBLESHOOTING
11.5 Handling Drive unit

Do not close the hopper forcibly when the hopper is open. Doing so may damage the drive unit.
(Left figure : Weigh hopper, Right figure: Pool hopper)
Fig. 11-1 Closing the hopper by hand (Example of don'ts)
The figure is only for explanation. The hopper may look different.)
When you turn off the main power when the hoppers are open or the hoppers remain open due to blackout, follow the procedure below for recovery.
1. Turn on the main power. 2. Enter the Full open lock menu. ( 6.8 Full Open Lock Menu)
3. Select the relevant weigh hopper and the pool hopper to perform Full open lock. 4. Close the Full open lock. 5. Confirm that all hoppers are closed. 6. If any of the hoppers remain open, repeat the procedure 3 to 5.
11-24
12 INSTALLATION
12.1 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 12.2 Installation Location and Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 12.3 Shipment and Lifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
12.3.1 12.3.2 12.3.3 12.3.4 Shipment Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lifting Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Weight, Center of Gravity, and Dimensions of the Weigher . . . Lifting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3 12-4 12-5 12-6
12.4 Installation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7

12.4.1 Unpacking the Weigher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8 12.4.2 Checking the Weigher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8 12.4.3 Carrying In and Installing the Weigher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8 12.4.4 Connecting the Power Cable and the Remote Control Unit . . . 12-8 12.4.5 Mounting the Timing Hopper Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11 12.4.6 Connecting the TH Signal Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11 12.4.7 Installation of the Timing hopper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12 12.4.8 Mounting the Discharge Chute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12 12.4.9 Mounting the Collection Chute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12 12.4.10 Mounting the Radial Trough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13 12.4.11 Mounting the Dispersion Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13 12.4.12 Mounting the Weigh Hopper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13 12.4.13 Mounting the Pool Hopper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14 12.4.14 Connecting with the Interlocked Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
12.5 Post-Installation Check and Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17

12.5.1 12.5.2 12.5.3 12.5.4 12.5.5 12.5.6 Checking Condition of Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Turning the Power On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Access Level Change. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zero Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Span Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation Checklist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17 12-18 12-19 12-21 12-23 12-25
<MEMO>
12 INSTALLATION
12 INSTALLATION
12.1 Summary
This chapter provides the information on the correct methods of installing the weigher. Installation work and test drive are performed our technical service persons. Check the installation place and prepare the power in advance. Also, when attempting to shift the weigher, follow the instructions described in this chapter.
WARNING
Only our technical service persons are permitted to install.
CAUTION
Before attempting to shift the weigher, consult the distributor where the weigher was purchased or your Ishida customer service representative. Unstable weigher may result in inaccurate weighing. For this reason, make sure the weigher is securely fastened.
<Contents>
Installation conditions, lifting for shipping, and installation procedures
<Intention>
To understand and master proper installation locations and environments, safety transportation and shifting of the weigher, and secure installatio
<intended reader>
Maintenance personnel Ishida Service representatives
12-1
12 INSTALLATION
12.2 Installation Location and Environment

The weigher installation site should conform to the following conditions in order to maximize productivity, ensure accuracy, and perform weighing operation safely.
CAUTION
When installing the weigher, observe the installation conditions. Improper installation may result in malfunction or damage.
NOTE The specifications for the power supply vary with weigher model. Conform to the specifications described in the contract document.
The weight varies with weigher model. Conform to the specifications described in the manufacturing instructions.
Table 12-1 Installation Conditions

Item
Environment
Condition
Avoid direct sunlight. Room temperature 0 to 40 C Room humidity 35 to 85% R.H (No condensation) No dust Prepare enough light for taking pictures of the products by camera. Hard horizontal surface with minimum vibration Sufficient space around the weigher to perform maintenance Earth wires are connected to the outlet. No electrical interference from such devices as a wireless transmitter 200/220 V, 50/60 Hz (3PH, 3 lines) Voltage fluctuation within 10% Frequency fluctuation within 5% Do not connect power devices which may emit electrical interference to the same power line as the weigher. Dry air Pressure: 0.5MPa to 0.6MPa (5kgf/cm2 to 6kgf/cm2) 250kg
Surface Space Static electricity Electrical interference Power supply (for standard specification)
Air (for WP specification) Weight (for standard specification)
12-2
12 INSTALLATION
12.3 Shipment and Lifting

This section describes the precautions and correct procedures for shipping and lifting the weigher. For prevention of accidents, read and thoroughly understand these precautions and procedures before performing the work.
WARNING
When shipping or lifting the weigher, make sure to conform to the following safety precautions, your safety standard, and all related national laws. Otherwise, death, injury, or damage to the weigher may result.
12.3.1 Shipment Precautions

When shipping the weigher, conform to the following precautions: 1. Attach "counter marks" to the piping, connections, and fittings, and leave them as attached while shipping. 2. Close the piping and other openings with removable seal caps, and leave them as closed until the time for installation in the site. Wrap and protect the protrusions of male screws with a cloth. 3. When there is a need to remove the electric cables for shipping, tie them up in groups, and protect them by wrapping them in plastic. Leave the cables tied up and wrapped until the time for installation in the site. 4. When shifting the weigher in its package with a forklift, be sure to insert the fork into the specified location.
12-3
12 INSTALLATION
12.3.2 Lifting Precautions

For the weight of the weigher, refer to the specifications described in the manufacturing instructions.
NOTE For the weighers with optional devices, consult the distributor where the weigher was purchased or your Ishida customer service representative. As for the weight that the optional specifications are equipped additionally, contact ISHIDA service desk.
1. Pay attention to the weight and center of gravity of the weigher when lifting. 2. Select lifting equipment suitable for the weight, and use it in the range of safe load limit. 3. Inspection items to be checked before lifting Is there twisting or damage to the wire rope? Is the wire rope long enough? Are the eye bolts securely mounted? 4. Precautions for lifting operations The slinging and lifting operation should be performed by a qualified operator. Select lifting equipment suitable for the weight. Attach metal pads or cloth to the protrusions and ends to prevent damage to the weigher. Notify all other personnel around the site of the start of lifting operations. Check the inclination and balance of the weigher during lifting operations. Check the condition of lifting equipment and wire ropes during lifting operation. 5. Precautions for shifting the lifted weigher Keep off areas under the lifted weigher. Do not shift the weigher above the aisles. 6. Precautions for setting down the weigher Remove any obstacles from the installation site before setting down the weigher. Conform to the specified lifting point and slinging procedures.
12-4
12 INSTALLATION
12.3.3 Weight, Center of Gravity, and Dimensions of the Weigher

The center of gravity of this weigher is as shown in the figure below.
NOTE For details, refer to the specifications described in the manufacturing instructions, or consult the distributor where the weigher was purchased or your Ishida customer service representative. When lifting the weigher, use equipment suitable for the weight and pay attention to the center of gravity of the lifted weigher.
Hc
Lc G(=Lc/2)
Fig. 12-1 Hanging procedure
12-5
12 INSTALLATION
12.3.4 Lifting Procedure

Follow the procedure described below to lift the weigher.
WARNING
Before performing lifting operations, confirm that there are no personnel around the weigher to be lifted. Never walk under a lifted weigher.
1. Confirm that the hook is mounted at the center of gravity of the weigher. 2. Before starting lifting operations, give an instruction to all personnel to keep off the site of the lifting operation. 3. Notify of the lifting operators the start of the operation with an arm signal.
CAUTION
Do not perform lifting operations quickly. Doing so may result in damage to the weigher or lifting equipment such as wire ropes.
4. Wind up the wire ropes, and stop just before the weigher is lifted up. 5. Restart to wind up the wire ropes until the weigher is lifted up, and confirm that the weigher is not inclined. If the weigher is inclined, lower the weigher to the ground, remove the cause of inclination, adjust the lifting condition, then restart lifting.
NOTE Possible causes of inclination are as follows:

The lengths of the wire ropes are not equal. The center of gravity and the attachment position of the wire ropes are not aligned.
6. During lifting operations, confirm that there is no damage to the wire ropes and the lifting equipment, and that the weigher is not inclined. 7. After completing unload and removing the eye volts, install the cap in the volt hole.
12-6
12 INSTALLATION
12.4 Installation Procedures

The outline of installation procedures is described below. For detailed procedures, refer to the section related to each operation item. Table 12-2 Installation Procedures
Unpacking the weigher (
12.4.1 Unpacking the Weigher)
Checking the weigher ( 12.4.2 Checking the Weigher)
Carrying in and installing the weigher ( 12.4.3 Carrying In and Installing the Weigher)
( Connecting the power cable and the remote control unit 12.4.4 Connecting the Power Cable and the Remote Control Unit)
Mounting the timing hopper frame ( 12.4.5 Mounting the Timing Hopper Frame )
Connecting the timing hopper signal line ( 12.4.6 Connecting the TH Signal Line )
<Mounting the components to the main body > Timing hopper installation ( Mounting the discharge chute ( Mounting the collection chute ( Mounting the radial trough ( Mounting the dispersion table ( Mounting the weigh hopper ( Mounting the pool hopper ( 12.4.7 Installation of the Timing hopper) 12.4.8 Mounting the Discharge Chute) 12.4.9 Mounting the Collection Chute) 12.4.10 Mounting the Radial Trough) 12.4.11 Mounting the Dispersion Table) 12.4.12 Mounting the Weigh Hopper) 12.4.13 Mounting the Pool Hopper)
Connecting with the interlocked devices( 12.4.14 Connecting with the Interlocked Devices)
NOTE After installing the weigher, check and adjust the installation condition. ( Section 12.5)
12-7
12 INSTALLATION
12.4.1 Unpacking the Weigher

CAUTION
When unpacking the weigher, wear gloves to prevent injury caused by cardboard or the crate.
The weigher is packed with cardboard (only the weighers for export). When unpacking the weigher, remove the cover over the package, then remove the cardboard and crate on the side.
12.4.2 Checking the Weigher

Check the following items after unpacking the weigher: 1. Is there damage to the weigher due to shipping? 2. Are there too many or too few parts?
NOTE The equipment damage or shortage of parts are found, contact the ISHIDA service desk.
12.4.3 Carrying In and Installing the Weigher

WARNING
When lifting the weigher, conform to the precautions described in Section12.3.1to perform the operation safely. Otherwise, death, injury, or damage to the weigher may result. When performing operations on the platform, wear a safety belt to prevent falling.
Install the weigher on the platform by crane. (
Section 12.3)
12.4.4 Connecting the Power Cable and the Remote Control Unit
After installing the weigher, follow the procedure described below to mount and adjust the remote control unit and connect the wiring.
12-8
12 INSTALLATION
WARNING
Connection of the power supply to the weigher should be performed by licensed electrical contractors, conforming to national and local electricity laws.
CAUTION
Before connecting the weigher to the installation site's power terminal, confirm with a tester that the power specifications of the weigher agrees with your power supply. If the supplied power is different from the power specifications of the weigher, it may result in serious damage to the weigher.
1. Follow the procedure described below to fix the main power switch: a. Mount the main power switch fixing metal (E) to the remote control unit (A) base metal with two screws (E1). b. Fix the main power switch (B) on the fixing metal (E) with two screws (E2). 2. Follow the procedure described below to adjust the angle of the remote control unit: a. Fix the remote control unit mounting bracket (D) to a designated position with four screws (D1). b. Adjust and fix the remote control unit with easily viewable angle by the knob volt (D3) and angle adjusting screws (D2).
CAUTION
Before connecting the weigher to the installation site's power terminal, confirm that the power cable (H) is not energized. Before connecting with the factory power terminal, install the remote control cable (F), and the power cable (G). Also check that the electric breaker is turned off.
3. Pass the power cable (G) into the main unit flame and fix the flexible tube to the main unit flame. 4. Connect the power cable (G) to the terminal [L1]/[L3] of the terminal block and the terminal [L11]/ [L31] of the QF02 primary side. 5. Pass the remote control cable (F) into the main unit flame and fix the flexible tube to the main unit flame. 6. Connect the communication cable XJ02 of the remote control cable (F) to the CAL unit relay connector in the main unit flame. 7. Connect the RCU power cable XC21 of the remote control cable (F) to the PS-RCU unit U01 in the main unit flame. Install the earth to the PS-0 unit earth bar. 8. Connect the power cable (H) to the [L1]/[L3]/[Earth] terminal of the terminal block PS-0 unit.
12-9
12 INSTALLATION
9. Connect the power cable (H) on the customer side to the factory power terminal (outlet) near the main unit.
Fig. 12-2 Connecting Electrical Components
Table 12-3 Destinations for Connecting Electrical Components

No.
1 2 3 4 5 6
Destination
PS-0 unit (To XT601 terminal block) PS-0 unit (To QF2 Primary side) PS-RCU unit (To U01-XC21 connector) CAL unit (To Ethernet cross relay cable) To the earth terminal block The power terminal on the customer side
12-10
12 INSTALLATION
Table 12-3 Destinations for Connecting Electrical Components (Continued)

No.
7
Destination
PS-0 unit (To XT601 terminal block)
12.4.5 Mounting the Timing Hopper Frame

1. Install the timing hopper flame to the bottom part of the main unit with four volts.
UNDERSIDE OF MAIN BODY FRAME
TH FRAME
Fig. 12-3 Timing Hopper Frame
12.4.6 Connecting the TH Signal Line

1. Fix the TH flexible tube to the main body frame from inside the main body frame. 2. Insert the TH signal line to the relay connector of the DUC board.
NOTE For connecting, follow the connecting connector number indication of the TH signal line and the relay connector indication of DUC board.
Fig. 12-4 TH Signal Line
3. Fix the part of exposing shield coating of the TH signal line in the main unit with the shield clamp and screws.
12-11
12 INSTALLATION
12.4.7 Installation of the Timing hopper

Install the timing hopper installation shaft by hanging the main unit's hook. Check that the lever of the timing hopper is fixed completely.
Fig. 12-5 Timing hopper
12.4.8 Mounting the Discharge Chute

Lower the discharge chute onto the support pins so that the pins go through the holes in the chute arms.
Fig. 12-6 Discharge Chute
12.4.9 Mounting the Collection Chute

1. With the fly nut side of the collection chute facing front, push the brackets at both sides to the bottom placing against the main unit guide. 2. Tighten the side fly nuts at both sides firmly.
Fig. 12-7 Collection chute
12-12
12 INSTALLATION
12.4.10 Mounting the Radial Trough

Place each radial trough on its trough base. Fix each trough by tightening its clamp lever.
Fig. 12-8 Radial Trough
12.4.11 Mounting the Dispersion Table

1. Screw the dispersion table onto the feeder.
NOTE Some models are of bolted type.

When installing the dispersion table, ensure that the dispersion table does not touch the trough.
Fig. 12-9 Dispersion Table
12.4.12 Mounting the Weigh Hopper

CAUTION
When mounting the weigh hoppers, do not apply excessive pressure to the weigh/drive unit WH hangers. Doing so may damage the load cells.
NOTE There are no matching number on the weigh hoppers. Each weigh hopper can be mounted to any of the hangers.
12-13
12 INSTALLATION
1. Attach the hooks of the weigh hopper installation part placing against the main unit installation pins. 2. Confirm that the weigh hopper open / close roller has been inserted completely in the main unit open / close lever.
OPEN/CLOSE ROLLER
HOOK
(MAIN UNIT) PIN
OPEN/CLOSE LEVER
12.4.13 Mounting the Pool Hopper

NOTE There are no matching number on the pool hoppers. Each pool hopper can be mounted to any of the hangers.
1. Attach the hooks of the pool hopper installation part placing against the main unit installation pins. 2. Confirm that the pool hopper open / close roller has been inserted completely in the main unit open / close lever.
OPEN/CLOSE ROLLER
PIN
HOOK
OPEN/CLOSE LEVER
(MAIN UNIT)
Fig. 12-11 Pool Hopper
12.4.14 Connecting with the Interlocked Devices

Connect the interlock cables of the relay unit to the interlock devices such as packer.
CAUTION
Be sure to position the interlock cables at a distance from the power cables to prevent improper actuation of the weigher. Also, when a relay or connector is used for a load, attach a surge killer or other similar device to prevent induction noise.
(1) Specifications of the interlock signals

The signals from the interlocked devices should conform to the following specifications:
12-14
12 INSTALLATION
Table 12-4 Specifications of the Interlock Signals

Device
1. Packer
Signal
Interlock signal A no-voltage contact interlock signal is output from the packer to the weigher.
I/O characteristics to and from the weigher

Input characteristics Circuit: Opto-isolator Voltage: 24VDC Current: Approx. 15mA Signal ON time: Minimum 50msec. Output characteristics Circuit: Relay contact Rating: Connection must be for 250VAC 5A load or less. Signal ON time: Set via the RCU. (Initial value is 100msec.) Output characteristics Circuit: Relay contact Rating: Connection must be for 250VAC 5A load or less. Output characteristics Circuit: Relay contact Rating: Connection must be for 250VAC 5A load or less.
Discharge completion signal A no-voltage contact signal is output from the weigher to the packer.
2. Infeeder
Infeed control signal A non-voltage contact signal is output from the weigher. Error signal A non-voltage contact signal is output from the weigher.
3. Other
(2) Relay unit external connections

Refer to the diagram and table below for the signal names and destination of the external connector terminals in the relay unit.
KA451
XJ451 KA452 KA453 KA454 KA455 KA456 KA457 KA458
HL451
HL452
HL453
HL454
HL455
HL456
HL457
HL458 XJ450
HL461
HL462
HL463
HL464
HL465
HL466
HL467
XJ456
XJ452
XJ453 XJ455
HL468
XJ454
Fig. 12-12 Destinations of the External Connector Terminals in the Relay Unit
12-15
12 INSTALLATION
Table 12-5 External Connector Terminals in the Relay Unit

Terminal No.
28-29 78-79 82-83 90-91 30-31 88-89 84-85 86-87 20-21 21-72 22-21 21-73 25-26 26-102 104-105 105-106 53-54
Terminal block No.

XJ451/1-2 XJ451/3-4 XJ451/5-6 XJ451/7-8 XJ451/9-10 XJ451/11-12 XJ451/13-14 XJ451/15-16 XJ452/1-2 XJ452/2-3 XJ452/4-5 XJ452/5-6 XJ452/7-8 XJ452/8-9 XJ452/10-11 XJ452/11-12 XJ452/13-14
Signal name
Discharge completion signal 1 Discharge completion signal 2 Error signal 1 Error signal 2 Infeed control signal 1 Infeed control signal 2 Control 1 Control 2 Interlock signal 1 Interlock signal 2 Auxiliary signal 5 Auxiliary signal 6 Auxiliary signal 1 Auxiliary signal 2 Auxiliary signal 3 Auxiliary signal 4 DC+24V
Destination
To the packer To the packer
To the infeeder To the infeeder *Optional *Optional To the packer To the packer *Optional *Optional *Optional *Optional *Optional *Optional
12-16
12 INSTALLATION
12.5 Post-Installation Check and Adjustment

After mounting the units and connecting the wiring, confirm that the components are correctly mounted.
WARNING
When entering the equipment for check after installation, turn off the main power switch and lock the main power switch. The operator is required to hold the key during operation.
Table 12-6 Post-Installation Check and Adjustment
Checking condition of assembly (
12.5.1 Checking Condition of Assembly)
Turning the power on ( 12.5.2 Turning the Power On)
Accessing the Installation Engineer Level ( 12.5.3 Access Level Change)
Zero adjustment ( 12.5.4 Zero Adjustment)
Span adjustment ( 12.5.5 Span Adjustment)
Completion of the work
12.5.1 Checking Condition of Assembly

Follow the procedure below for check that each part such as the dispersion table, the radial trough, and the hoppers has been completely attached. 1. Pool hopper fixing check Confirm that the pool hopper open / close roller has been inserted completely in the main unit open / close lever.
HOOK
OPEN/CLOSE LEVER OPEN/CLOSE ROLLER
PIN
(MAIN UNIT)
Fig. 12-13 Pool Hopper
12-17
12 INSTALLATION
2. Weigh hopper fixing check Confirm that the weigh hopper open / close roller has been inserted completely in the main unit open / close lever.
HOOK
(MAIN UNIT) PIN
OPEN/CLOSE ROLLER
OPEN/CLOSE LEVER
3. Checking mounting condition of the dispersion table Confirm that the dispersion table is securely mounted. Confirm that the dispersion table is not making contact with the radial troughs.
4. Checking contact between the radial troughs Confirm that the radial troughs are not making contact with each other. In case of interfering, reinstall the radial trough.
12.5.2 Turning the Power On

CAUTION
Before connecting the weigher to the installation site's power terminal, confirm with a tester that the power specifications of the weigher agrees with your power supply. If the supplied power is different from the power specifications of the weigher, it may result in serious damage to the weigher.
Follow the procedure described below to turn on the power. When connecting the power plug and turning on the main power switch next to the remote control unit, the initialization menu of the operation level (Level 0) is displayed automatically.
12-18
12 INSTALLATION
1. Check the wiring of the PS-0 terminal block. 2. Confirm that the electrical leakage breaker is ON.
NOTE Remain the electrical leakage breaker in the main unit always ON.
3. Turn on the installation site's main power switch, then turn on the main power switch on the side of the RCU. The main menu will appear. 4. Press the power key . Power will be supplied to the feeder and hopper drive circuits.
Fig. 12-18 Main Menu
12.5.3 Access Level Change

Switch to the installation level by following the next procedure. 1. Press the Select operation level key The menu to select the operation level appears. .
12-19
12 INSTALLATION
2. Select "Installation level." Password entering keyboard appears. 3. Enter the password. The Main Menu of the Installation level appears.
NOTE The default is "2" as the Installation level password at shipment.

"?" is displayed as the entered password.
Fig. 12-20 Select Operation Level Menu
12-20
12 INSTALLATION
12.5.4 Zero Adjustment

Follow the procedure described below to perform zero adjustment. 1. Press the Machine Set pop-up key . The Machine Set Menu appears.
2. Select "Manual Adjustment." The manual adjustment manual appears. 3. Press the weigher adjustment tab in case "Weigher Adjustment" has not been selected. The weight value of each head appears.
Fig. 12-22 Machine Set Menu
4. Press the ALL HD. SLCT/CLR key All weigh hopper keys will be selected.
12-21
12 INSTALLATION
5. Press the Zero Adjustment key
The hoppers open and close, and zero adjustment starts with the message "Please wait a moment."
6. After zero adjustment, confirm that the weight display of each weight head is within 0.0 g0.1 g.
NOTE When the weight display of each head No. key is over 0.1 g or under -0.1 g, operate from the procedure (3) again.
Operation details of zero adjustment procedure ( 6.5 Zero Adjustment Menu) Next, perform Span adjustment. (Next section)
12-22
12 INSTALLATION
12.5.5 Span Adjustment

For Span adjustment, follow the procedure below. 1. Put the span adjustment weight on the all weight hoppers.
NOTE Normally the span adjustment wait is 200 g, however it varies depending on the specification.
Fig. 12-26 Weight hopper
2. Press the All Heads Select / Clear key All weight heads are selected.
3. Press the Span adjustment key Span adjustment starts.
12-23
12 INSTALLATION
4. Confirm that the weight display of each weight head No. key is within 200.0 g0.1 g.
NOTE Confirm that the weight display of each weight head No. key is over nor under 200.0 g0.1 g. When the display is over 200.01 g or under 199.9 g, operate from the procedure (2) again.
5. Remove the span adjustment weight from the weight hopper. Confirm that the weight display of each weight head No. key is almost 0.0 g0.1 g.
NOTE When the weight display of each head No. key is over 0.1 g or under -0.1 g, operate from the procedure (3) "12.5.4 Zero Adjustment" again.
The screen returns to the Main Menu.
12-24
12 INSTALLATION
12.5.6 Installation Checklist

Table 12-7 Installation Checklist
Check type
1. Weigher model
Check items
Model check
Procedure
Compare weigher with configuration diagram and specification sheet.
Standard
All specifications match. (visual check)
2. Power supply
Voltage and frequency check
Check mechanical, electrical, All specifications match. manufacturing instruction (visual check) sheet, order sheet. Press the breaker button. Pull on cords (not too strongly). Confirm via the operation panel display. Cord should not be disconnected.
3. Main body
2) Breaker check 3) PS-0, PS-2 terminal wiring check
4. Weigher functions
1) Plasma display check 2) Memory card check
Check that display is normal. Display is stable and no missing dots. Insert the card in the remote control box and perform the preset writing or the reading. Confirm on the remote control display.
3) Printer check 4) Zero adjustment check
Set as Preset, press the output Displayed data and printout key and print to the printer. correspond. Perform zero adjustment and confirm each head displays zero. After zero adjustment, load a span adjustment weight on each head and perform span adjustment. CELL SPAN WT. Stand. 6L 200.0g Start weigher in production mode. With the weigher in stable status, no head 1 digit) With the weigher in stable status, no head more than 1 digit off from span value. Adjusted value 200.00.1g Vibration action (confirm by hand) At the feeder value of 99, vibration should be indicated within 3.0 0.25mm for strong vibration. Lateral deviation is within 1.5mm. PH gate does not contact WH.
5) Span adjustment check
6) Operation confirmation of the radial feeder
7) PH and WH gate open/close operation check
Check that PH and WH are aligned parallel. (WH cannot be adjusted to parallel.) Open PH gates and check open/ close operation.
12-25
12 INSTALLATION
Table 12-7 Installation Checklist (Continued)

Check type
4. Weigher functions (Continued)
Check items
Procedure

Standard
Levers move smoothly. Levers stop at correct positions. Gates close quietly. No metallic noise
8) PH and WH lever function and stop Start weigher in production check mode and load a weight on each WH in turn to activate PH and WH. 9) PH and WH gate noise and opening Start weigher in production operation check mode and load a weight on each WH in turn to activate PH and WH. 10) Actual/displayed weight check Set dump weight log.
Actual weight is not off by more than 5 digits for 2 or more cycles consecutively. Relay board LED lights.
5. External signals
1) Interlock signal check
Short interlock signal wire.
2) Discharge completion signal check Load weight equal to set Check via relay board LED or weight on WH and discharge buzzer tester. the products. 3) Infeed control signal check 6. Error displays 1) Zero point defect check Press down on DF table. Set zero interval, and discharge the products. Check via relay board LED or buzzer tester. Check Zero error and the machine number on the remote control display. Check the LED lightning on the relay board. Check Pool hopper error and the machine number on the remote control display. Check Weight hopper error and the machine number on the remote control display. Visual check Visual check Typical branch numbered Visual check model and specification detail check Visual check Mounting position and dimensions of the remote control unit (height, width, and discharge level) Tool box, weight, weighing scale, and accessories check Visual check and actual measurement
2) PH error check
Remove PH and start drain and press PH levers. Remove WH and start drain and press WH levers.
3) WH error check
7. Document check
1) Mechanical manufacturing instructions check 2) Electrical manufacturing instructions check 3) Manufacturing request & order specification check 4) Specification check 5) Approved drawing check
6) Accessories and spare parts check
12-26
13 APPENDIX
13.1 Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 13.2 Electrical Unit Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2 13.3 Overall Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3 13.4 Remote Control BOX unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
13.4.1 RCU Board (P-970*). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 13.4.2 PRN Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 13.4.3 TP-I/F Board (P-5573*). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
13.5 Main Electrical Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8

13.5.1 13.5.2 13.5.3 13.5.4 HUB Board (P-5535*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9 MPS Board (P-5436*). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9 FDRV Board (P-5578*). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10 FDC Board (P-5532*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
13.6 Base Unit Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

13.6.1 Preamp Board (P-5435*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
13.7 AFV Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

13.7.1 AFV Preamp Board (P-5488*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
13.8 Relay Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

13.8.1 EXC Board (P-5426*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14 13.8.2 Relay Board (P-5506*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
13.9 PS-0 Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16 13.10PS-2 Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17 13.11Weight/Drive Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
13.11.1 DUC Board (P-5428*). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18 13.11.2 DDU Board (P-5439*). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
13.12CAL UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19

13.12.1 ADC BOARD (P-5576*). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20 13.12.2 WCU BOARD (P-5561*). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21 13.12.3 DMU board (P-5562 *) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22
13.13PS FEEDER UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-24

13.13.1 FPS BOARD (P-5580 *) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-24
13.14Circuit Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-25

13.14.1 [TOTAL DIAGRAM] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-25 13.14.2 BLOCK DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-25
<MEMO>
13 APPENDIX
13 APPENDIX
13.1 Summary
This chapter provides electric-related information on CCW-R-214W* for reference only. The customer's weigher may be different from that described in this chapter.
NOTE Do not perform repairs of weigher or parts replacement at customer's own discretion. Consult the distributor where the weigher was purchased or your Ishida customer service representative in advance and follow the instructions.
< Contents >

Board location in the electrical unit Overall wiring diagram and block diagram
< Intention >

To provide information on servicing of the weigher and replacement of components
< Intended reader >

Maintenance personnel Ishida Service representatives
13-1
13 APPENDIX
13.2 Electrical Unit Configuration
No.
1 2 3 4 5 6
Name
Electrical unit main (HUB board, MPS board, FDRV board, FDC board) CAL unit (ADC board, WCU board, DMU board) RELAY unit (EXC board, RELAY board) PS-0 unit PS-2 unit PS-FEEDER unit
NOTE The layout of the electrical units varies with weigher model.
13-2
13 APPENDIX
13.3 Overall Block Diagram

DF RF DF BASE UNIT
PREAMP BOARD
RCU UNIT
P-5435* P-5488*
RCU BOARD (P-970*)
Electrical unit main

FDRV BOARD P-5578*
PREAMP BOARD
DC/DC FDC BOARD P-5532*
AFV UNIT
WDU UNIT CAL UNIT

ADC BOARD P-5576* HUB BOARD P-5535* DUC BOARD P-5428* PREAMP
WCU BOARD P-5561*
DDU BOARD MPS BOARD P-5436* P-5439*
CAM SENSOR BOARD P-5207*
DUC BOARD P-5562*
HIGH SPEED COMMUNICATION LINE P-5207*
TH DU
P-5429*
CAL-PS
UNIT
CAM SENSOR BOARD
DU BOARD
EXC BOARD P-5426*
POWER IN
PS-0 UNIT
PS-2 UNIT
RELAY BOARD P-5506*
SIGNALS INPUT/OUTPUT
MAIN POWER SWITICH
PS UNIT
RELAY UNIT
13-3
13 APPENDIX
13.4 Remote Control BOX unit
3 1
No.
1 2 3 PRINTER UNIT TOUCH PANEL DISPLAY
Name
MEMORY CARD INSERTION PORT
13-4
13 APPENDIX
13.4.1 RCU Board (P-970*)
Battery
1. Touch screen (touch panel) input control 2. Printer control and statistical totals processing 3. Communication with the CAL unit by a high speed communication line 4. Memory card input/output control
DIP-SW setting
SW1: Multipurpose DIP-SW
No.
4 3 2 1 ON: Debug mode Not used
Function
Default at shipment
OFF OFF OFF OFF
13-5
13 APPENDIX
SW2 : LCD Panel type setting DIP - SW

No.
6
Function
Reverse display - 1 (XJ 3-38 pin, XJ 6-3 pin) OFF: High level ON: Low level Reverse display - 2 (XJ 3-41 pin) OFF: High level ON: Low level 4=OFF, 3=OFF, 2=OFF, 1=ON, 800600 4=OFF, 3=OFF, 2=ON, 1=OFF, 1024768
Default at shipment
OFF
ON
4 3 2 1
OFF OFF OFF ON
SW 3: COM 2 Port setting SW

Function
OFF: COM2 port is RS-232C level (using XJ 16) ON: COM2 port is C-MOS level (using XJ 21)
Default at shipment
ON
SW 4 Power setting SW
Function
OFF: Using ATX type power, Starts by the power SW ON: Non-using AT type power, Starts by turning the power ON
Default at shipment
ON
SW 5: Onboard power SW
Power SW Connected to the XJ 9 (external power SW) line.
T1: CMOS clear plague

Function
1-2: Normal operation 2-3: CMOS, RTC clear
Default at shipment
1-2 side
CAUTION
For battery replacement, refer to 10.3.8 "Replacement of Memory backup battery."
13-6
13 APPENDIX
13.4.2 PRN Board

Board
Solder jumper
1. Thermal printer control (printing and paper feed)
Board jumper setting

As for the solder jumper, set the data enter format at JP 1 to JP 6. Set JP 1 to JP 5 to open and JP6 to short.
13.4.3 TP-I/F Board (P-5573*)
1. Touch panel control
13-7
13 APPENDIX
13.5 Main Electrical Unit
3 3
No.
1 2 3 4 HUB BOARD (P-5535*) MPS BOARD (P-5436*) FDRV BOARD (P-5578*) FDC BOARD (P-5532*)
Name
NOTE The drawing is applied to CCW-R-214W.
13-8
13 APPENDIX
13.5.1 HUB Board (P-5535*)
1. Junction for communication between the WCU board and DUC board or FDC board via a high speed communication line
NOTE Before replacing the board, confirm the suffix number.
13.5.2 MPS Board (P-5436*)
13-9
13 APPENDIX
1. Junction for DC39V power supply from the PS-2 unit DUC board
13.5.3 FDRV Board (P-5578*)
Board function
1. Drive control of the linear feeder 2. Relays and distributes the linear feeder power from PS feeder unit.
13.5.4 FDC Board (P-5532*)

NOTE Set the DIP switch to the setting before replacement when replacing the board.
13-10
13 APPENDIX
1. Drive control of the linear feeder
Setting of the switches on the board

DIP SW
SW 1-1 SW 1-2 SW 1-3 SW 1-4
Setting
OFF OFF OFF OFF
13-11
13 APPENDIX
13.6 Base Unit Feeder

13.6.1 Preamp Board (P-5435*)
1. Amplification of the dispersion feeder load cell output
NOTE Before replacing the board, confirm the suffix number.
13-12
13 APPENDIX
13.7 AFV Unit
No.
1 2 PREAMP BOARD LOAD CELL (BAS-0.25L)
Name
13.7.1 AFV Preamp Board (P-5488*)
J597
J596
P-5488
J595
1. Amplification of the AFV load cell output
13-13
13 APPENDIX
13.8 Relay Unit
No.
1 2 EXC BOARD (P-5426*) RELAY BOARD (P-5506*)
Name
13.8.1 EXC Board (P-5426*)
*In most instances, set all DSW1 switches to OFF.
1. Communication with the CAL unit 2. Timing hopper (optional) control
13-14
13 APPENDIX
13.8.2 Relay Board (P-5506*)
KA451
XJ451 KA452 KA453 KA454 KA455 KA456 KA457 KA458
HL451
HL452
HL453
HL454
HL455
HL456
HL457
HL458 XJ450
HL461
HL462
HL463
HL464
HL465
HL466
HL467
XJ456
XJ452
XJ453 XJ455
HL468
XJ454
1. Input of interlock signal from packer, and input monitor 2. Output of discharge completion signal to packer, and output monitor 3. Error signal output, and output monitor 4. Output of infeed control signal to the infeeder, and output monitor 5. Input of option signal, and input monitor 6. Output of option signal, and output monitor
LED
HL 451 HL 452 HL 453 HL 454 HL 455 HL 456 HL 457 HL 458
Function
Discharge completion signal 1 Discharge completion signal 2 Error signal 1 Error signal 2 Infeed control signal 1 Infeed control signal 2 Control 1 Control 2
LED
HL 461 HL 462 HL 463 HL 464 HL 465 HL 466 HL 467 HL 468
Function
Interlock signal 1 Interlock signal 2 Input signal 5 Input signal 6 Input signal 1 Input signal 2 Input signal 3 Input signal 4
13-15
13 APPENDIX
13.9 PS-0 Unit
No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 CIRCUIT BREAKER NOISE FILTER
Name
POWER INPUT TERMINAL BLOCK EARTH BLOCK Circuit breaker Electromagnetic contactor Terminal block AC FUSE board (P-5507 *) Switching power for relay unit (24 V DC) Switching power for remote control BOX (24 V DC)
1. Leakage is detected to shut down the power. 2. Line filter 3. DC power supply to the remote control BOX unit and the relay unit 4. AC power supply to PS feeder unit, the remote control unit, and CAL unit
13-16
13 APPENDIX
13.10 PS-2 Unit
No.
1 2 DC FUSE BOARD (P-5508) DC POWER (+39V)
Name
1. DC power (+39V) supply for the stepping motor 2. Protective fuse board for the stepping motor
NOTE The fuse board counts vary depending on the head counts of the machine.
13-17
13 APPENDIX
13.11 Weight/Drive Unit

13.11.1 DUC Board (P-5428*)
NOTE When the weigh/drive unit or the DUC board is replaced, set the weigher model using the DIP switch.
1. Communication with the WCU board through the HUB board via a high speed communication line 2. Open/close control of PH and WH 3. Load cell output amplification via a preamp circuit
13.11.2 DDU Board (P-5439*)
J226
J224
J225
J223
J221
J222
P-5439A
SI-8201L
A2918SWV
A2918SWV
1. Hopper open/close motor driving
13-18
13 APPENDIX
13.12 CAL UNIT
No.
1 2 3 4 ADC board (P-5576 *) WCU board (P-5561 *) DMU board (P-5562)
Name
Switching power for CAL unit (DC 5 V,15 V)
13-19
13 APPENDIX
13.12.1 ADC BOARD (P-5576*)
IC40
IC39 IC38 IC37 IC36 IC35 IC34 IC15
IC8 IC19 IC28 IC32 IC48
IC7
IC6
IC5
IC4
IC3
IC2
IC1 IC21 IC20
IC12
IC33
IC31 IC17
IC29 IC27 IC30
IC26 IC22 IC23 IC41
IC16
IC18
IC14
IC13
IC50
IC49
SW2
IC11
IC43
IC45 IC25
IC24
IC42
IC44
IC46
IC47
P-5576A
SW2
1. Change the analog weight data from each weighing part (load cell) to the digital weight data and send to WCU board.
DIP switch setting

DIP SW
SW2-1 SW2-2 SW2-3 SW2-4
Function
ON (Starts DSP from PROM)/ OFF (Starts DSP from FLASH) For Debug For Debug For Debug
Default at shipment
ON OFF OFF OFF
13-20
13 APPENDIX
13.12.2 WCU BOARD (P-5561*)

SW2 SW3 SW1
SW4
1. Processing combination weighing 2. Sends control command to each unit based on the result of combination calculation. 3. Sending and receiving various data with the remote control BOX unit
DIP SW Setting
DIP SW
SW1 SW2-1 to 8 SW3-1 SW3-2 SW3-3 SW3-4 SW4-1 SW4-2 SW4-3 SW4-4
Setting
OFF Different depending on software Normally all OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF
13-21
13 APPENDIX
13.12.3 DMU board (P-5562 *)

SW1 SW2 SW3 Battery
Board function
1. Data processing 2. Memory of Total and Parameter
DIP Switch setting

DIP SW
SW 1 - 1 to SW 1 - 8 Not used SW 2-1 to SW 2 - 5 SW2-6 SW2-7 SW2-8 SW3-1 SW3-2 SW3-3 SW3-4 Not used ON: Clear SRAM on memory initialization OFF: Does not clear SRM on memory initialization ON: Does not output FIF 0 at DMU application OFF: Outputs FIF 0 at DMU application ON: Does not output message of boot loader OFF: Outputs message of boot loader ON: Boot loader mode OFF: Application execution mode Fix at OFF; do not turn ON. ON: Flash memory write is inhibited. OFF: Flash memory write is enabled. Fix at OFF; do not turn ON.
Function
Default at shipment
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
13-22
13 APPENDIX
CAUTION
For battery replacement, refer to 10.3.8 "Replacement of Memory backup battery."
13-23
13 APPENDIX
13.13 PS FEEDER UNIT
No.
1 2 3 FPS board (P-5580 *) Switching power (12 V DC) Electromagnetic contactor
Name
NOTE The above figure is an example of CCW-R-214W-S.
13.13.1 FPS BOARD (P-5580 *)
Board function
1. Change AC power to DC power. (Power for feeder)
13-24
13 APPENDIX
13.14 Circuit Diagram

13.14.1 [TOTAL DIAGRAM]
(1) CCW-R-214W* (2) CCW-R-210W* 102-3911-02 102-3912-06 107-2460-02 107-2461-06
13.14.2 BLOCK DIAGRAM

NOTE The drawing Nos. are applied to CCW-R-214W*.
(1) REMOTE CONTROL UNIT (2) RELAY UNIT (3) AFV UNIT (4) ELECTRICAL UNIT (5) WEIGH DRIVE UNIT (6) CAL UNIT (7) POWER SUPPLY UNIT
105-3851-04 107-2454-00 107-2452-02 107-2453-06 107-2455-03 107-2456-07 105-0490-02 105-3665-08 100-3638-01
13-25
13 APPENDIX
13-26
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
INDEX
INDEX
A Access Level Change 12-19 ADC BOARD (P-5576*) 13-20 AFD Setting 6-120 AFV 2-4 AFV COMPENSATION ERROR 11-14 AFV OUTPUT ERROR 11-14 AFV PARAMETER ERROR 11-14 AFV Preamp Board (P-5488*) 13-13 AFV Unit 13-13 AFV ZERO ERROR 11-14 All WH key 6-96 Amplitude Check for the Radial Feeder (Monthly) 10-10 Auto Adjustment Method 6-76 Auto Adjustment range Setting 6-81 Auto zero adjustment 2-4 Auto Zero key 6-37 Checking Condition of Assembly 12-17 Checking the Weigher 12-8 Circuit Diagram 13-25 Cleaning Unremovable Unit 9-15 Close key 6-40 CLR key (keyboard) 3-8 CLR key (ten-key) 3-6 Collection chute 2-6 Collection Chutes 9-12 Combination Calculation 6-89 Combination details setting 6-116 Combination weighing 2-4 Compact flash 6-23 Components and Functions of the Remote Control Unit (RCU) 3-2 Connecting the Power Cable and the Remote Control Unit 12-8 Connecting the TH Signal Line 12-11 Connecting with the Interlocked Devices 12-14 Control Panel 6-18 Control panel key 6-7 Control Unit Power ON 4-5 Coping all Machine Set items 6-109 Coping all presets 6-102 Copy and edition of registered product data 7-2 Correction after Data Entry and Setting 3-9 Count Priority Program 8-10 Count setting output during driving 8-17 Crack Check (Annually) 10-11 Current Total Output 4-24
B Backlight Saver 6-20 Bag-on-demand 2-4 Base Unit Feeder 13-12 Before Washing and Sterilizing 9-2 BL Saver On Time 6-20 BLOCK DIAGRAM 13-25 Bonus Adding 8-2 BS key 3-6 BS key (keyboard) 3-8
D C CAL UNIT 13-19 CANCEL key 3-6, 3-8 CAPS key 3-8 Carrying In and Installing the Weigher 12-8 Changing the Preset 6-57 Changing the Production Method Quickly 7-4 Characters 6-20 Check for the Hopper Open/Close Roller (Monthly) 10-10 Check for the Rubber Cover (Annually) 10-12 Daily Inspection 10-2 Data Entry 3-6 DATE & TIME key 6-7 DDU Board (P-5439*) 13-18 Destination ID 6-21 Device Check 6-91 DF 2-6 DF key 6-39, 6-96 Discharge chute 2-7 Discharge Chutes 9-13 Discharge completion signal 2-4
INDEX
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Dispersion feeder 2-6 Dispersion Table 9-9 Dispersion table 2-6 Display area 3-6 Display Selection Menu on Production Menu 6-33 Display selection Menu on the Production menu 4-21 DMU board (P-5562 *) 13-22 Drain 2-4 Drain key 6-27 Drain Menu 6-37 Drain START key 6-38 Drain STOP key 6-37 Draining the Products 4-17 Drive Power Shutdown and Indication 1-7 DS 2-4 DUC Board (P-5428*) 13-18
H Handling Drive unit 11-24 Head 2-4 Help function 6-26 Help key 6-7 Hopper key 6-96 HUB Board (P-5535*) 13-9
I Infeed Control key 6-37 Infeeder 2-4 Information Display key 6-7 Initialization of all Machine Set items 6-112 Initialization of all presets 6-105 Inlet Chute 9-9 Inlet chute 2-6 Input / Output junction signal 6-92 Installation Checklist 12-25 Installation Location and Environment 2-3, 12-2 Installation of the Timing hopper 12-12 Installation Procedures 12-7 Intended Use of the Weigher 2-2 Interlock signal 2-4 INTRODUCTION 2-1 IS 2-4 IS-WH 6-84 Item Tab Menu 6-49
E Electrical Unit Configuration 13-2 Emergency Stop and Restart 4-2 Entering Numeric Data 3-6 Entry guide display area 3-6 Error Clear and Handling 11-15 Error Display Handling 11-3 Every output 4-23 EXC Board (P-5426*) 13-14
F FDC Board (P-5532*) 13-10 FDRV Board (P-5578*) 13-10 Feeder Adjust tab 6-37, 6-39 Feeder Adjustment Menu 6-71 Feeder Details Setting 6-126 Full Open key 6-27 Full Open Lock 6-40 Full-scale 2-4 FUNCTION OF THE OPERATION PANEL 6-1 Fuse replacement 10-14 K keyboard 3-6
L Language select key 6-7 Language Selection Setting 6-20 Layout Setting 6-99 Layout Setting / Data Manager 6-99 Lifting Precautions 12-4 Lifting Procedure 12-6 List Display 6-43 Lower Weight Limit Value 6-56
G General Precautions to be Observed 1-3
M Machine Set edition 6-107
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
INDEX
Machine Set Menu 6-85 Machine Set pop-up key 6-28 Machine Tab Menu 6-48 Main Components 2-6 Main Electric Unit 13-8 Main Menu 6-27 Main power switch 2-7 Main Unit, Dispersion Unit, and Drive Unit 9-16 Manual Adjustment 6-86 Master 2-4 Menu key 3-3 Message Board 6-8 Methods of Washing and Sterilizing 9-5 Monitoring Menus Displayed during Count Priority Program 8-15 Mounting the Collection Chute 12-12 Mounting the Discharge Chute 12-12 Mounting the Dispersion Table 12-13 Mounting the Pool Hopper 12-14 Mounting the Radial Trough 12-13 Mounting the Timing Hopper Frame 12-11 Mounting the Weigh Hopper 12-13 MPS Board (P-5436*) 13-9 Multi dump 2-5
Overweight 2-4 OVERWEIGHT ERROR 11-6
P Packer 2-4 Packer Interlock Setting 6-122 Packer interlock specification setting 6-121 Parameters Setting 6-114 Parent and Child Mix Weighing 8-2 Parent and Child Weighing 8-2 Participating Machine Set 6-119 Password Set 6-20 Pattern 1 11-5 Pattern 2 11-9 Pattern 3 11-11 Pattern 4 11-13 Pattern 5 11-14 Pattern 6 11-14 Pattern 7 11-15 Pattern 8 11-15 Periodic Inspection 10-4 Peripheral devise setting 6-121 PH 2-6 PH key 6-39, 6-96 PH-RF 6-84 Photo Display 6-42 Piece Weight Revision 8-12 Pool hopper 2-6 Pool, Weigh, and Booster Hoppers 9-11 Post-Installation Check and Adjustment 12-17 Pre-Startup Inspection 4-4, 10-2 Preamp Board (P-5435*) 13-12 Preset data Management 5-12 Preset key 6-27 Preset Manager 6-100 Preset Manager and Copy 6-100 Preset Menu 6-44 Preset Procedure 5-5 Presetting 2-4, 5-2 Printer 2-7 printer no paper 4-27 Printer Paper Loading 4-27 PRN Board 13-7 Procedures to Set Count Priority Program 8-14 Procedures to Set Parent and Child Weighing 8-7 Product 2-4
N Network Analyze 6-93 New product registration quoting registered product data 7-2 NEW PRODUCTS 5-1
O Open key 6-40 Open/Close Operation Check for the Hopper Gate (Monthly) 10-9 Operation Outline 2-8 Operation Panel 3-3 Operation Panel and Data Entry 3-3 Operational level select key 6-7 Others Tab Menus 6-51 Outline Dimension 2-3 Outline of Production Sequence 4-3 Output the Preset 6-58 Overall Block Diagram 13-3 Overscale 2-4 Overscale error 11-7
INDEX
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Product Setting 6-45 Product Setting (Double) 5-5 Product Tab Menu 6-45 PRODUCTION 4-1 Production Menu 6-30 PRODUCTION Menu during Parent and Child Weighing 8-9 Production Pause 4-22 Production Pause and Restart 4-22 Production Procedure 4-4 Production Restart 4-22 Production Status Output 4-23 Program number display 6-95 Proper weight 2-4 PS FEEDER UNIT 13-24 PS-0 Unit 13-16 PS-2 Unit 13-17
R Radial feeder 2-6 Radial Trough 9-10 Radial trough 2-6 Range 2-4 RCU 2-7 RCU Board (P-970*) 13-5 Registration Sequence (double) 5-4 Reject Timing Hopper Setting 6-125 Relay Board (P-5506*) 13-15 Relay Unit 13-14 Remote Control BOX unit 13-4 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT 3-1 Remote Control Unit 9-17 Remote control unit 2-7 Removable unit cleaning 9-8 Replacement of Memory backup battery 10-13 Return key (keyboard) 3-8 Return key (ten-key) 3-6 RF 2-6 RF key 6-39, 6-96 Ring Shutter Setting 6-123
Select Preset 4-9 Select Preset Menu 6-42 Selecting a Language 6-13 Selecting an Operation Level 6-14 Selecting the Preset No. Directly 4-10 Selection and copy of the Machine Set items 6-108 Selection and Initialization of Preset 6-104 Selection and initialization of the Machine Set item 6-111 Self-diagnosis Menu 6-91 Set item display area 3-6 Setting Contents 5-2 Setting Items Related to Count Priority Program 8-10 Setting Items Related to Parent and Child Weighing 8-4 Setting the Date & Time 6-24 Setting the Machine performance 5-8 Setting the Weight Value(Double) 5-9 SHIFT key 3-8 Shipment and Lifting 12-3 Shipment Precautions 12-3 Slave 2-4 Space key 3-8 Span 2-4 Span Adjustment 10-6, 12-23 Span Check (Monthly) 10-4 SPAN ERROR 11-5 Special Safety Precautions 1-5 Specification 2-3 STAGGER 2-4, 6-84 Stagger delay 2-4 Standard Specification 2-3 Start-up Assistant 6-12 Starting Production 4-15 Startup Assistant key 6-7 Status display 3-3 Stopping Production 4-16 Stroke-on-demand 2-4 Switching the Display for the Select Preset Menu 4-9 Switching to the Installation Level 6-16 Switching to the Operator Level 6-15 Switching to the Site Engineer Level 6-15
S SAFETY 1-1 Screen Control 6-19 Section 2-4 Section division setting 6-118
T Taking photos of product 6-47 Target Weight Value 6-55 ten-key pad 3-6
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
INDEX
Terminology 2-4 Test Drive 6-96 TH 2-7 Timing Adjust tab 6-37 Timing Adjustment Menu 6-83 Timing Hopper 9-14 Timing hopper 2-7 Timing hopper drive unit 2-7 Timing Hopper Setting 6-125 TOTAL DIAGRAM 13-25 Total Menu 6-60 TP-I/F Board (P-5573*) 13-7 Troubleshooting 11-20 Turning the Power On 12-18 Types of Parent and Child Weighing 8-2
Weight, Center of Gravity, and Dimensions of the Weigher 12-5 Weight/Drive Unit 13-18 WH 2-6 WH key 6-39, 6-96 WH-DS 6-84 WH-PH 6-84
Z Zero Adjst key 6-27 Zero Adjustment 4-12, 12-21 Zero Adjustment Menu 6-29 ZERO ERROR 11-5
U Underweight 2-4 Unit Select tab 6-39 Unpacking the Weigher 12-8 Upper set key 3-3 Upper Setting Bar 6-7 Upper Weight Limit Value 6-56 Using Feeder Adjustment Function on the DRAIN Menu 7-4 Using the Full Open Function 7-5
W Wallpaper 6-20 Warning Indications -Types and Definitions 1-2 Warning Label Handling 1-6 Warning Label Location 1-6 Warning Labels 1-6 Washing and Sterilizing Procedures for Each Unit and Component 9-8 WCU BOARD (P-5561*) 13-21 WDU 2-6 Weigh Adjustment 6-86 Weigh hopper 2-6 Weigh/drive unit 2-6 Weigher Malfunction 11-17 Weigher Power Off 4-18 Weigher Power On 4-5 Weigher setting 6-119 Weight details setting 6-114 Weight Setting 6-55
INDEX
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
44 SANNO-CHO, SHOGOIN, SAKYO-KU, KYOTO, 606-8392 JAPAN PHONE: (075)771-4141 FACSIMILE: (075)751-1634 URL: http://www.ishidajapan.com

CCW R 214W S

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

CCW R 214W S

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PN : 105 - 5359 - 05

Cautionary Items on Software

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

MANUAL OBJECTIVES AND STRUCTURE

1. Purpose of this manual

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

All personnel involved in operations with the equipment

6 Functions of the operation panel 7 Useful functions

Daily and periodic inspection Adjustment of the components

Operators Maintenance personnel

System managers Maintenance personnel

End of the manual

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

3. Illustrations and notations used in this manual

Illustrations of the equipment

Descriptions for key operations

Notations used in this manual

CCW-R-2** INSTRUCTION MANUAL

GENERAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

Drive Power Shutdown and Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

2.4 2.5 2.6

3 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT

CCW-R-2** INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Displays during Production . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

Production Pause and Restart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

Production Status Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23

Printer Paper Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27

Preset data Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

6 FUNCTION OF THE OPERATION PANEL

CCW-R-2** INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Upper Setting Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

6.4 6.5 6.6

Drain Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37 Full Open Lock Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39

Select Preset Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42

6.10 Preset Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44

6.11 Total Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60

CCW-R-2** INSTRUCTION MANUAL

6.11.2 6.11.3 6.11.4 6.11.5 6.11.6

6-66 6-67 6-68 6-69 6-70

6.12 Feeder Adjustment Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-71

CCW-R-2** INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Changing the Production Method Quickly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Count Priority Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

CCW-R-2** INSTRUCTION MANUAL

10.3 Periodic Inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

12.4 Installation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7

CCW-R-2** INSTRUCTION MANUAL

12.5 Post-Installation Check and Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17

13.5 Main Electrical Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8

13.6 Base Unit Feeder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

13.7 AFV Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

13.8 Relay Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

CCW-R-2** INSTRUCTION MANUAL

13.12 CAL UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19

13.13 PS FEEDER UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-24

13.14 Circuit Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-25

Drive Power Shutdown and Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

CCW-R-2** INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CCW-R-2** INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Warning Indications -Types and Definitions

CCW-R-2** INSTRUCTION MANUAL

General Precautions to be Observed

CCW-R-2** INSTRUCTION MANUAL